StoreWay Optima3600 User'

User's Guide
REFERENCE
86 A1 33FH 03
StoreWay Optima
Optima3600
StoreWay Optima
Optima3600
User's Guide
Hardware
December 2012
BULL CEDOC
357 AVENUE PATTON
B.P.20845
49008 ANGERS CEDEX 01
FRANCE
REFERENCE
86 A1 33FH 03
The following copyright notice protects this book under Copyright laws which prohibit such actions as, but not limited
to, copying, distributing, modifying, and making derivative works.
Copyright © Bull SAS 2012
Printed in France
Trademarks and Acknowledgements
We acknowledge the rights of the proprietors of the trademarks mentioned in this manual.
All brand names and software and hardware product names are subject to trademark and/or patent protection.
Quoting of brand and product names is for information purposes only and does not represent trademark misuse.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Bull will not be liable for errors
contained herein, or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the use of this material.
Contents
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................xvii
About This Document....................................................................................................................................xxi
Conventions in This Document ............................................................................................................... xxi
Document Organization ..........................................................................................................................xxii
About Other Documents .........................................................................................................................xxiv
About Warning Labels..................................................................................................................................xxv
Disk Array Controller ..............................................................................................................................xxvi
Controller (CONT) ................................................................................................................................ xxviii
HPE, DPE ..............................................................................................................................................xxix
Power Supply ......................................................................................................................................... xxx
Battery ....................................................................................................................................................xxxi
Fan ........................................................................................................................................................xxxii
Disk Enclosure ..................................................................................................................................... xxxiii
Power Cable .........................................................................................................................................xxxiv
Disposal of the Unit ....................................................................................................................................xxxv
CHAPTER 1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Features ...............................................................................................................................................2
1.1.1 High Performance and Large Capacity........................................................................................2
1.1.2 High Reliability and High Availability............................................................................................2
1.1.3 Operation Management ...............................................................................................................2
1.2 Components..........................................................................................................................................3
1.2.1 Disk Array Controller....................................................................................................................3
1.2.2 Disk Enclosure...........................................................................................................................16
1.2.3 LED Display ...............................................................................................................................21
1.3 Basic Operation...................................................................................................................................34
1.3.1 Powering On the Disk Array System .........................................................................................34
1.3.2 Powering Off the Disk Array System .........................................................................................39
CHAPTER 2 Workflow - Installation to Operation .......................................................................................43
CHAPTER 3 Installing the Disk Array System .............................................................................................47
3.1 Preparation..........................................................................................................................................48
3.2 Installation ...........................................................................................................................................51
3.2.1 Mounting a Disk Array Unit on a Rack.......................................................................................51
3.2.2 Mounting a Disk Enclosure on a Rack.......................................................................................51
3.2.3 Installing Disk Drives .................................................................................................................59
3.3 Connection ..........................................................................................................................................63
3.3.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................63
3.3.2 Connecting a Disk Enclosure.....................................................................................................64
3.3.3 Connecting an Application Server .............................................................................................64
3.3.4 Connecting LAN Cables ............................................................................................................65
3.3.5 Connecting Power Supply Cables .............................................................................................66
CHAPTER 4 Storage Manager .....................................................................................................................69
4.1 How Storage Manager is provided......................................................................................................70
4.1.1 How Storage Manager is Provided and Its Configuration..........................................................70
iii
User Guide
4.1.2 The Operating Environment of Storage Manager Client............................................................72
4.2 Before Starting Storage Manager Client .............................................................................................76
4.3 Setup
.............................................................................................................................................83
4.3.1 Installing Network Setting Tool ..................................................................................................83
4.3.2 Configuring IP Addresses by Using Network Setting Tool.........................................................93
4.3.3 Setting a Time Zone of the Disk Array.......................................................................................99
4.4 Installing Storage Manager Agent Utility on Application Server ........................................................106
4.5 Starting Storage Manager Client.......................................................................................................107
4.5.1 Before Starting Storage Manager Client..................................................................................107
4.5.2 Starting Storage Manager Client .............................................................................................107
CHAPTER 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC) ..................................................................................................111
5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................112
5.2 Collecting Host Information From Application Servers......................................................................113
5.2.1 Collecting Host Information From Application Server ..............................................................114
5.3 Initialization by Storage Manager......................................................................................................115
5.3.1 Initialization Wizard..................................................................................................................115
5.3.2 Binding a Pool..........................................................................................................................129
5.3.3 Binding a Hot Spare.................................................................................................................134
5.3.4 Binding Logical Disks...............................................................................................................138
5.3.5 Collecting Host Information......................................................................................................143
5.3.6 Assigning Logical Disks ...........................................................................................................148
5.4 Checking Connection from Application Servers ................................................................................152
CHAPTER 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI) .............................................................................................153
6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................154
6.2 Initialization by Storage Manager......................................................................................................156
6.2.1 Initialization Wizard..................................................................................................................156
6.2.2 iSCSI Setup Tool .....................................................................................................................173
6.2.3 Binding a Pool..........................................................................................................................174
6.2.4 Binding a Hot Spare.................................................................................................................179
6.2.5 Binding Logical Disk ................................................................................................................183
6.2.6 Assigning Logical Disk.............................................................................................................188
6.3 Checking Connection from Application Servers ................................................................................192
CHAPTER 7 Installing Optional Parts ........................................................................................................193
7.1 Optional Parts ...................................................................................................................................194
7.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................198
7.3 Installation and Removal...................................................................................................................199
7.3.1 Front Bezel ..............................................................................................................................199
7.3.2 Host Port Extension (HPE) ......................................................................................................201
7.3.3 Disk Drives...............................................................................................................................202
7.3.4 Disk Enclosures .......................................................................................................................203
7.3.5 Batteries (BBU)........................................................................................................................207
7.3.6 Cache Modules........................................................................................................................207
CHAPTER 8 Changes to the Configuration ...............................................................................................209
8.1 Modifying the Settings by Using DIP Switches .................................................................................210
8.2 Modifying the Configuration by Storage Manager (FC).....................................................................211
8.2.1 Binding Additional Logical Disks (FC)......................................................................................211
8.2.2 Adding Application Servers......................................................................................................212
8.2.3 Using the Initialization Wizard to Modify the Configuration......................................................213
iv
User Guide
8.2.4 Modifying the Disk Array Configuration ...................................................................................213
8.3 Modifying the Configuration by Storage Manager (iSCSI) ................................................................214
8.3.1 Binding Additional Logical Disks (iSCSI) .................................................................................214
8.3.2 Using the Initialization Wizard to Modify the Configuration......................................................215
8.3.3 Modifying the Disk Array Configuration ...................................................................................215
CHAPTER 9 Troubleshooting .....................................................................................................................217
9.1 Troubleshooting According to Device Conditions .............................................................................218
9.2 Network Setting Tool Errors ..............................................................................................................225
9.3 Storage Manager Errors....................................................................................................................226
9.3.1 Errors Experienced Throughout Storage Manager Usage ......................................................226
9.3.2 Errors in Initialization ...............................................................................................................230
9.3.3 Errors in Pool Binding ..............................................................................................................231
9.3.4 Errors in Hot Spare Binding .....................................................................................................232
9.3.5 Errors in Logical Disk Binding..................................................................................................232
9.3.6 Errors in Retrieving Host Information.......................................................................................233
9.3.7 Assigning Logical Disk Errors ..................................................................................................233
9.4 iSCSI Setup Tool Errors....................................................................................................................234
9.4.1 iSCSI Setup Tool (Windows) Errors ........................................................................................234
9.4.2 iSCSI Setup Tool (Linux) Errors ..............................................................................................236
9.4.3 iSCSI Setup Tool Error Codes.................................................................................................238
9.5 StoreWay Multipath (Windows) Errors ..............................................................................................241
9.6 StoreWay Multipath (Linux) Errors ....................................................................................................243
9.7 Changing Network Settings for Monitoring Disk Arrays from Storage Manager ...............................245
9.8 Troubleshooting at Installation ..........................................................................................................246
9.8.1 The IP Address of the iSCSI Port cannot be set on the
Storage Manager Initialization Wizard............................................................................246
9.8.2 The logical disks of the disk array cannot be recognized by the host,
or an error message is displayed ...................................................................................246
9.9 SAS Connection Errors .....................................................................................................................250
9.10 User Support ...................................................................................................................................251
9.10.1 Unit Life Span and Maintenance Period ................................................................................251
9.10.2 Before You Call......................................................................................................................251
9.10.3 Contacts for questions and consultation................................................................................252
APPENDIX A Specifications.........................................................................................................................253
APPENDIX B How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (FC) ......................................................255
B.1 Installing Storage Manager Agent Utility ..........................................................................................255
B.1.1 Before Installation....................................................................................................................255
B.1.2 Installation ...............................................................................................................................258
B.2 Collecting/Registering Host Information on Application Server .......................................................259
B.2.1 Collecting Host Information by Using File Output....................................................................259
B.2.2 Registering Host Information by Using File Output .................................................................260
B.3 Checking Connection from Application Server ................................................................................264
B.3.1 Check connection under a Windows environment ..................................................................264
B.3.2 Check the Multipath Settings and Status ................................................................................267
APPENDIX C How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI) ..................................................269
C.1Initializing Application Server ............................................................................................................269
C.1.1 Preparation..............................................................................................................................270
C.1.2 Installing iSCSI Software Initiator............................................................................................273
C.1.3 Installing StoreWay Multipath..................................................................................................278
v
User Guide
C.1.4 Setting up iSCSI Software Initiator..........................................................................................279
C.2 iSCSI Setup Tool .............................................................................................................................287
C.3 Checking Connection from Application Server ................................................................................290
C.3.1 Logon Steps in Windows Environments..................................................................................291
C.3.2 Confirmation Steps in Windows Environments .......................................................................301
C.3.3 Check the Multipath Settings and Status ................................................................................303
APPENDIX D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator).............................304
D.1 Initializing Application Server ...........................................................................................................304
D.1.1Overview ..................................................................................................................................304
D.1.2 Preparation..............................................................................................................................306
D.1.3 Setting up BACS4 (Broadcom Advanced Control Suite 4)......................................................307
D.1.4 Setting up iSCSI Initiator .........................................................................................................312
D.2 Setting up iSCSI Software Initiator ..................................................................................................319
D.2.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................319
D.2.2 Logon Steps in Windows Environments..................................................................................320
APPENDIX E How to Set/Check Application Server (Linux) (FC) .............................................................324
E.1 Installing Storage Manager Agent Utility ..........................................................................................324
E.1.1 Before Installation....................................................................................................................324
E.1.2 Installation ...............................................................................................................................325
E.2 Collecting/Registering Host Information on Application Server .......................................................326
E.2.1 Collecting Host Information by Using File Output....................................................................326
E.2.2 Registering Host Information by Using File Output .................................................................327
E.3 Checking Connection from Application Server ................................................................................331
E.3.1 Confirmation Steps in Linux environment................................................................................331
E.3.2 Check the StoreWay Multipath Settings and Status................................................................332
APPENDIX F How to Set/Check Application Server (Linux) (iSCSI) ........................................................336
F.1 Initializing Application Server ...........................................................................................................336
F.1.1 Preparation ..............................................................................................................................337
F.1.2 Installing iSCSI Software Initiator ............................................................................................340
F.1.3 Installing StoreWay Multipath ..................................................................................................341
F.1.4 Setting up iSCSI Software Initiator ..........................................................................................342
F.2 iSCSI Setup Tool 345
F.3 Checking Connection from Application Server ................................................................................349
F.3.1 Logon Steps in Linux Environment..........................................................................................349
F.3.2 Confirmation steps in Linux Environment ................................................................................350
F.3.3 Check the Multipath Settings and Status.................................................................................351
APPENDIX G How to Set/Check Application Server (VMware) (FC) ........................................................354
APPENDIX H How to Set/Check Application Server (VMware) (iSCSI) ....................................................355
H.1 Initializing Application Server ...........................................................................................................355
H.1.1 Preparation..............................................................................................................................356
H.1.2 Creating VMKernel Port ..........................................................................................................359
H.1.3 Setting up Software iSCSI Initiator..........................................................................................365
H.2 Checking Connection from Application Server ................................................................................370
H.2.1 Executing Rescan ...................................................................................................................371
H.2.2 Setting up a Data Store...........................................................................................................373
H.2.3 Confirmation Using Guest OS.................................................................................................375
APPENDIX I Installing StoreWay Multipath ................................................................................................377
vi
User Guide
I.1 For Windows Application Server .......................................................................................................377
I.2 For Linux Application Server .............................................................................................................382
APPENDIX J LED Inspection Checksheet ..................................................................................................385
J.1 Disk Array Controller ........................................................................................................................385
APPENDIX K Notes-Using iSCSI Supported Disk Array Unit ...................................................................389
APPENDIX L iSCSI Connection Configuration-Examples.........................................................................391
L.1 Connection Between Application Server and LAN ...........................................................................391
L.2 Connection Between Management Server and LAN .......................................................................392
APPENDIX M Script for Reporting Information Registered with iSNS Server ........................................395
APPENDIX N Retrieve Initiator Information on Application Servers Registered with iSNS Server ......397
APPENDIX O CHAP Authentication ............................................................................................................401
O.1 General ...........................................................................................................................................401
O.2 Constraints on Secrets ....................................................................................................................401
O.3 Description of Operation Modes ......................................................................................................401
O.4 CHAP Username Setting .................................................................................................................401
O.5 Correspondence between Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator Secret Setting and iSMCLI ..............402
APPENDIX P Registering Host Information Manually ...............................................................................405
P.1 Registering host information manually (FC) ....................................................................................405
P.2 Registering host information manually (iSCSI) ................................................................................409
vii
User Guide
viii
List of Figures
Figure 1:
Figure 1-1:
Figure 1-2:
Figure 1-3:
Figure 1-4:
Figure 1-5:
Figure 1-6:
Figure 1-7:
Figure 1-8:
Figure 1-9:
Figure 1-10:
Figure 1-11:
Figure 1-12:
Figure 1-13:
Figure 1-14:
Figure 1-15:
Figure 1-16:
Figure 1-17:
Figure 1-18:
Figure 1-19:
Figure 1-20:
Figure 1-21:
Figure 1-22:
Figure 1-23:
Figure 1-24:
Figure 1-25:
Figure 1-26:
Figure 1-27:
Figure 1-28:
Figure 1-29:
Figure 1-30:
Figure 1-31:
Figure 1-32:
Figure 1-33:
Figure 1-34:
Figure 1-35:
Figure 1-36:
Figure 1-37:
Figure 1-38:
Figure 1-39:
Figure 1-40:
Figure 3-1:
Figure 3-2:
Figure 3-3:
Example of Recommended Configuration ..............................................................................xviii
Disk Array Configuration (Perspective View) ..............................................................................3
Front View (Without Front Bezel) ................................................................................................4
Front View (With Front Bezel) .....................................................................................................4
Configuration Example (Two FC 4-Port HPEs Installed) ............................................................5
Controller Installed with BBUs and Fans.....................................................................................7
BBU.............................................................................................................................................8
Fan ..............................................................................................................................................8
Perspective View of Power Supply .............................................................................................9
Front View of Power Supply........................................................................................................9
Perspective View of Management Card....................................................................................10
Front View of Management Card ..............................................................................................10
Perspective View of FC-HPE ....................................................................................................11
Front View of FC-HPE...............................................................................................................11
Perspective View of 1G-iSCSI-HPE..........................................................................................12
Front View of 1G-iSCSI-HPE ....................................................................................................12
Perspective View of 10G-iSCSI-HPE........................................................................................13
Front View of 10G-iSCSI-HPE ..................................................................................................13
Perspective View of SAS-HPE..................................................................................................14
Front View of SAS-HPE ............................................................................................................14
Perspective View of DPE ..........................................................................................................15
Front View of DPE.....................................................................................................................15
2.5 Inch Disk Drive Model .........................................................................................................16
3.5 Inch Disk Drive Model .........................................................................................................16
Front Bezel (Option)..................................................................................................................16
Disk Drive Front View................................................................................................................17
Disk Enclosure Rear View (with AC Power Supplies)...............................................................18
Power Supply ............................................................................................................................19
Adapter......................................................................................................................................20
Disk Array Controller: Front View..............................................................................................21
Disk Array Controller: PS (Power Supply).................................................................................24
Disk Array Controller: MNG.......................................................................................................25
Disk Array Controller: FC-HPE..................................................................................................26
Disk Array Controller: 1G-iSCSI-HPE .......................................................................................26
Disk Array Controller: 10G-iSCSI-HPE .....................................................................................27
Disk Array Controller: SAS-HPE ...............................................................................................28
Disk Array Controller: DPE........................................................................................................29
LED Display - Disk Array Unit, Disk Enclosure, and Disk Drives ..............................................29
LED Display - Disk Array Controller Power and Disk Enclosure Power....................................31
LED Display - Disk Array Enclosure Adapter ............................................................................32
AC Power Off Sequence (FC Port Connection) ........................................................................38
Flow of Preliminary Setups .......................................................................................................49
Rack Mount Kit..........................................................................................................................52
Rail ............................................................................................................................................52
ix
Figure 3-4:
Figure 3-5:
Figure 3-6:
Figure 3-7:
Figure 3-8:
Figure 3-9:
Figure 3-10:
Figure 3-11:
Figure 3-12:
Figure 3-13:
Figure 3-14:
Figure 3-15:
Figure 3-16:
Figure 3-17:
Figure 4-1:
Figure 4-2:
Figure 4-3:
Figure 4-4:
Figure 4-5:
Figure 4-6:
Figure 4-7:
Figure 4-8:
Figure 4-9:
Figure 4-10:
Figure 4-11:
Figure 4-12:
Figure 4-13:
Figure 4-14:
Figure 4-15:
Figure 4-16:
Figure 4-17:
Figure 4-18:
Figure 4-19:
Figure 4-20:
Figure 4-21:
Figure 4-22:
Figure 4-23:
Figure 4-24:
Figure 4-25:
Figure 4-26:
Figure 5-1:
Figure 5-2:
Figure 5-3:
Figure 5-4:
Figure 5-5:
Figure 5-6:
Attaching Rail to Rear Pole .......................................................................................................53
Screwing Rail on Front Pole......................................................................................................53
Attaching Rail to Rear Pole .......................................................................................................54
Attaching Inner Rail...................................................................................................................55
Attaching Ear Bezels or Front Bezel Clips ................................................................................56
Securing Unit 1..........................................................................................................................57
Securing Unit 2..........................................................................................................................58
Attaching Location Label...........................................................................................................60
Removing Dummy Carrier.........................................................................................................61
Disk Drive..................................................................................................................................61
Inserting Disk Drive ...................................................................................................................62
Connection Example .................................................................................................................64
Example of LAN Cable Connection...........................................................................................65
AC Cable...................................................................................................................................67
Example of Recommended Configuration ................................................................................71
Internet Options Window...........................................................................................................76
Trusted Sites Window ...............................................................................................................77
Internet Options Window...........................................................................................................78
Security Settings Window .........................................................................................................79
Update Tab of Java Control Panel ............................................................................................80
Advanced Tab of Control Panel ................................................................................................82
Start Page of Setup...................................................................................................................84
Select Installation Method .........................................................................................................85
Confirm Software ......................................................................................................................86
License Agreement ...................................................................................................................87
Choose Destination Location ....................................................................................................88
Starting Network Setting Tool ...................................................................................................89
Connect Disk Array - Example ..................................................................................................93
Select a Disk Array - Start up....................................................................................................94
Select a Disk Array....................................................................................................................95
Network Settings .......................................................................................................................96
Network Setting Tool - Confirmation Dialog Box.......................................................................98
Select Disk Array Type..............................................................................................................99
Select Installation Method .......................................................................................................100
Setting in a Time Zone ............................................................................................................101
Setting in a Time Zone - Select Time Zone.............................................................................102
Setup Completion....................................................................................................................103
Log On Screen ........................................................................................................................108
Log On Screen (Expanded) ....................................................................................................109
Main Screen ............................................................................................................................110
Configuration - Auto-Collection of Host Information................................................................113
Configuration - Collect Host Information Using Host Information Collection Command .........114
Starting Initialization Wizard .................................................................................................... 116
Welcome to Initialization Wizard .............................................................................................117
Setting Disk Array Subsystem Name ......................................................................................118
Set Time..................................................................................................................................119
x
User Guide
Figure 5-7:
Figure 5-8:
Figure 5-9:
Figure 5-10:
Figure 5-11:
Figure 5-12:
Figure 5-13:
Figure 5-14:
Figure 5-15:
Figure 5-16:
Figure 5-17:
Figure 5-18:
Figure 5-19:
Figure 5-20:
Figure 5-21:
Figure 5-22:
Figure 5-23:
Figure 5-24:
Figure 5-25:
Figure 5-26:
Figure 5-27:
Figure 6-1:
Figure 6-2:
Figure 6-3:
Figure 6-4:
Figure 6-5:
Figure 6-6:
Figure 6-7:
Figure 6-8:
Figure 6-9:
Figure 6-10:
Figure 6-11:
Figure 6-12:
Figure 6-13:
Figure 6-14:
Figure 6-15:
Figure 6-16:
Figure 6-17:
Figure 6-18:
Figure 6-19:
Figure 6-20:
Figure 6-21:
Figure 6-22:
Figure 6-23:
Figure 7-1:
Figure 7-2:
Set Time - Setting NTP Server................................................................................................121
Unlocking License ...................................................................................................................122
Host Port Connection Parameters (FC) ..................................................................................124
Edit Dialog...............................................................................................................................124
Port Mode Switching Screen...................................................................................................126
Finish Initialization Wizard.......................................................................................................128
Pool Bind.................................................................................................................................129
Pool Bind - Confirmation .........................................................................................................131
Pool Bind - Completion ...........................................................................................................133
Hot Spare Bind - List Display ..................................................................................................134
Hot Spare Bind - View Display ................................................................................................135
Hot Spare Bind - Completion ..................................................................................................137
Logical Disk Bind.....................................................................................................................138
Logical Disk Bind - Confirmation .............................................................................................140
Logical Disk Bind - Completion ...............................................................................................142
Host Information Collection - Setting Method..........................................................................143
Host Information Collection - Registration...............................................................................145
Host Information Collection - Completion................................................................................147
Assignment of Logical Disk .....................................................................................................148
Assignment of Logical Disk - Confirm .....................................................................................150
Assignment of Logical Disk - Finish ........................................................................................151
Starting Initialization Wizard....................................................................................................157
Welcome to Initialization Wizard .............................................................................................158
Set Disk Array Subsystem Name............................................................................................159
Set Time..................................................................................................................................161
Set Time - Setting NTP Server................................................................................................163
Unlock License........................................................................................................................164
Host Connection Port Parameters (iSCSI)..............................................................................166
Host Connection Port Parameters (iSCSI) - Setting ...............................................................167
Set iSNS Server ......................................................................................................................169
Finish Initialization Wizard.......................................................................................................171
Status - Storage Manager Server ...........................................................................................172
Pool Bind.................................................................................................................................174
Pool Bind - Confirmation .........................................................................................................176
Pool Bind - Completion. ..........................................................................................................178
Hot Spare Bind - List Display ..................................................................................................179
Hot Spare Bind - View Display ................................................................................................180
Hot Spare Bind - Completion ..................................................................................................182
Logical Disk Bind.....................................................................................................................183
Logical Disk Bind - Confirmation .............................................................................................185
Logical Disk Bind - Completion ...............................................................................................187
Assignment of Logical Disk .....................................................................................................188
Assignment of Logical Disk - Confirm .....................................................................................190
Assignment of Logical Disk - Finish ........................................................................................191
Key of the Front Bezel.............................................................................................................199
Inserting the Front Bezel (1)....................................................................................................200
xi
Figure 7-3:
Figure 7-4:
Figure 7-5:
Figure 7-6:
Figure 7-7:
Figure 7-8:
Figure 8-1:
Figure 8-2:
Figure 8-3:
Figure 8-4:
Figure 8-5:
Figure 8-6:
Figure B-1:
Figure B-2:
Figure B-3:
Figure B-4:
Figure B-5:
Figure B-6:
Figure C-1:
Figure C-2:
Figure C-3:
Figure C-4:
Figure C-5:
Figure C-6:
Figure C-7:
Figure C-8:
Figure C-9:
Figure C-10:
Figure C-11:
Figure C-12:
Figure C-13:
Figure C-14:
Figure C-15:
Figure C-16:
Figure C-17:
Figure C-18:
Figure C-19:
Figure C-20:
Figure C-21:
Figure C-22:
Figure C-23:
Figure C-24:
Figure C-25:
Figure C-26:
Figure C-27:
Figure C-28:
Inserting the Front Bezel (2)....................................................................................................200
Removing the Front Bezel.......................................................................................................201
Removing the Disk Drive.........................................................................................................202
SAS Cable Connection ...........................................................................................................203
Cables and Connectors...........................................................................................................204
SAS Cable Connections and DE/PD Numbers .......................................................................205
DIP Switch...............................................................................................................................210
Binding a Logical Disk (FC).....................................................................................................211
Logical Disk Bind (FC) ............................................................................................................212
Message Asking Whether to Stop Monitoring .........................................................................213
Binding a Logical Disk (iSCSI) ................................................................................................214
Message Asking Whether to Stop Monitoring .........................................................................215
Getting Started - Host Information Collection..........................................................................260
Host Information Collection - Setting Method..........................................................................261
Host Information Collection - Registration...............................................................................262
Host Information Collection - Completion................................................................................263
Computer Management - Device Manager .............................................................................265
Computer Management - Disk Management ..........................................................................266
Unit with NF53x1-xFxx (10Gbps iSCSI 2port Controllers) ......................................................271
Unit with NF53x1-xFxx (1Gbps iSCSI 2port Controllers) ........................................................271
Configuration Example............................................................................................................272
Microsoft iSCSI (1) Dialog Box................................................................................................273
Microsoft iSCSI (2) Screen......................................................................................................273
Software Update Installation Wizard Screen (1) .....................................................................274
Software Update Installation Wizard Screen (2) .....................................................................275
Software Update Installation Wizard Screen (3) .....................................................................276
Software Update Installation Wizard Screen (4) .....................................................................277
Software Update Installation Wizard Screen (5) .....................................................................278
Application Server Desktop Screen ........................................................................................278
iSCSI Initiator Properties (General Tab) Screen .....................................................................279
iSCSI Initiator Properties (General Tab) Screen .....................................................................280
CHAP Secret Input Window ....................................................................................................280
iSCSI Initiator Properties (Discovery Tab) Screen ..................................................................282
Add Target Portal Screen........................................................................................................282
Authentication Error Screen ....................................................................................................283
iSCSI Initiator Properties (Discovery Tab) Screen ..................................................................283
iSCSI Initiator Properties (Discovery Tab) Screen ..................................................................284
iSNS Server Add Screen.........................................................................................................284
iSCSI Initiator Properties (Discovery Tab) Screen ..................................................................285
iSCSI Initiator Properties (General Tab) Screen .....................................................................286
iSCSI Setup Tool - Log on to the Target .................................................................................288
iSCSI Initiator Properties (Targets Tab) Screen......................................................................291
Log On to Target Screen.........................................................................................................292
Advanced Setting (General Tab) Screen ................................................................................293
Log On to Target Screen.........................................................................................................294
iSCSI Initiator Properties (Targets Tab) Screen......................................................................296
xii
User Guide
Figure C-29:
Figure C-30:
Figure C-31:
Figure C-32:
Figure C-33:
Figure C-34:
Figure D-1:
Figure D-2:
Figure D-3:
Figure D-4:
Figure D-5:
Figure D-6:
Figure D-7:
Figure D-8:
Figure D-9:
Figure D-10:
Figure D-11:
Figure D-12:
Figure D-13:
Figure D-14:
Figure D-15:
Figure D-16:
Figure D-17:
Figure E-1:
Figure E-2:
Figure E-3:
Figure E-4:
Figure F-1:
Figure F-2:
Figure F-3:
Figure H-1:
Figure H-2:
Figure H-3:
Figure H-4:
Figure H-5:
Figure H-6:
Figure H-7:
Figure H-8:
Figure H-9:
Figure H-10:
Figure H-11:
Figure H-12:
Figure H-13:
Figure H-14:
Figure H-15:
Figure H-16:
Log On to Target Screen.........................................................................................................297
Advanced Setting (General Tab) Screen ................................................................................298
Log On to Target Screen.........................................................................................................299
iSCSI Initiator Properties (Target Tab) Screen .......................................................................300
Device Manager ......................................................................................................................301
Disk Management ...................................................................................................................302
BACS4 Start Screen ...............................................................................................................307
Screen Displayed Immediately After Starting BACS4.............................................................308
iSCSI Adapter - Configuration Tab..........................................................................................309
iSCSI IPv4 Configurations Tab ...............................................................................................310
Setting Change Confirmation Screen......................................................................................311
Warning Message Dialog Box.................................................................................................311
iSCSI Initiator Properties - Configuration Tab .........................................................................312
iSCSI Initiator Properties - Discovery Tab...............................................................................313
Discover Target Portal Dialog Box ..........................................................................................314
Advanced Settings - Local Adapter Setup ..............................................................................315
Advanced Settings - Initiator IP Setup ....................................................................................316
Discover Target Portal Dialog Box ..........................................................................................317
Authorization Failure Dialog Box.............................................................................................317
Discovery Tab .........................................................................................................................318
iSCSI Initiator Properties - Targets Tab ..................................................................................320
Connect To Target Dialog Box................................................................................................321
Advanced Setting - General Tab.............................................................................................322
Getting Started - Host Information...........................................................................................327
Set Host Information - Select How to Set................................................................................328
Set Host Information - Specifying Host Information File .........................................................329
Host Information Collection - Completion................................................................................330
Unit with NF53x1-xF21xx (10Gbps iSCSI 2port Controllers) ..................................................338
Unit with NF53x1-xF11xx (1Gbps iSCSI 2port Controllers) ....................................................338
Configuration Example............................................................................................................339
Unit with NF53x1-xF21xx (10Gbps iSCSI 2port Controllers) ..................................................357
Unit with NF53x1-xF11xx (1Gbps iSCSI 2port Controllers) ....................................................357
Configuration Example............................................................................................................358
VMware Infrastructure Client Layout Screen ..........................................................................359
Add Network Wizard Screen (1)..............................................................................................360
Add Network Wizard Screen (2)..............................................................................................360
Add Network Wizard Screen (3)..............................................................................................361
Warning Screen ......................................................................................................................361
DNS and Routing Configuration Screen .................................................................................362
Add Network Wizard Screen (4)..............................................................................................363
Add Network Wizard Screen (5)..............................................................................................363
Add Network Wizard Screen (6)..............................................................................................364
Hardware Configuration Page Screen ....................................................................................365
General Tab in iSCSI Initiator Properties Screen....................................................................365
General Properties Screen......................................................................................................366
Dynamic Discovery Tab in iSCSI Initiator Properties Screen..................................................366
xiii
Figure H-17:
Figure H-18:
Figure H-19:
Figure H-20:
Figure H-21:
Figure H-22:
Figure H-23:
Figure H-24:
Figure H-25:
Figure I-1:
Figure I-2:
Figure I-3:
Figure I-4:
Figure I-5:
Figure I-6:
Figure L-1:
Figure L-2:
Figure L-3:
Figure L-4:
Figure O-1:
Figure O-2:
Figure O-3:
Figure P-1:
Figure P-2:
Figure P-3:
Figure P-4:
Figure P-5:
Figure P-6:
Add Target Sending Server Screen ........................................................................................367
CHAP Authentication Tab in iSCSI Initiator Properties Screen...............................................368
CHAP Authentication Screen ..................................................................................................369
Hardware Configuration Screen (1) ........................................................................................371
Hardware Configuration Screen (2) ........................................................................................371
General Tab in iSCSI Initiator Properties Screen....................................................................372
Add Storage Wizard Screen (1) ..............................................................................................373
Add Storage Wizard Screen (2) ..............................................................................................373
Add Storage Wizard Screen (3) ..............................................................................................374
Storage Multipath Environment Checker ................................................................................377
Storage Multipath InstallShield Wizard - Welcome Page 1.....................................................378
Storage Multipath InstallShield Wizard - Welcome Page 2.....................................................379
Storage Multipath InstallShield Wizard - Ready to Install the Program...................................380
Storage Multipath InstallShield Wizard - Completed...............................................................381
Storage Multipath Installer Information ...................................................................................381
Connection Between Application Server and LAN..................................................................391
Connection Between Management Server and LAN - Direct Configuration ...........................392
Connection Between Management Server and LAN - Switch Configuration ..........................393
Connection Between Management Server and LAN - Non-Supported Configuration ............393
iSCSI Initiator Authentication Setting (General Tab) Screen ..................................................402
iSCSI Initiator (General Tab) Screen ......................................................................................403
iSCSI Initiator CHAP Secret Input Window .............................................................................403
Set Host Information - Setting Method ....................................................................................405
Set Host Information - Registration .........................................................................................406
Set Host Information - Assignment of WWPNs.......................................................................407
Set Host Information - Completion ..........................................................................................408
Set Host Information - Registration .........................................................................................409
Assignment of Logical Disks - Assignment of Initiators...........................................................410
xiv
List of Tables
Table 1:
Table 2:
Table 3:
Table 4:
Table 1-1:
Table 1-2:
Table 1-3:
Table 1-4:
Table 1-5:
Table 1-6:
Table 1-7:
Table 1-8:
Table 1-9:
Table 1-10:
Table 1-11:
Table 1-12:
Table 1-13:
Table 1-14:
Table 1-15:
Table 1-16:
Table 1-17:
Table 1-18:
Table 1-19:
Table 1-20:
Table 1-21:
Table 1-22:
Table 3-1:
Table 3-2:
Table 3-3:
Table 4-1:
Table 4-2:
Table 4-3:
Table 7-1:
Table 7-2:
Table 7-3:
Table 8-1:
Table 8-2:
Table 9-1:
Table 9-2:
Table 9-3:
Table 9-4:
Table 9-5:
Table 9-6:
Table A-1:
Table A-2:
Table E-1:
Table F-1:
Table J-1:
Table J-2:
Conventions ............................................................................................................................. xxi
Terms Used.............................................................................................................................. xxi
Document Organization ........................................................................................................... xxii
Reference Documents ............................................................................................................ xxiv
UID LED (blue).......................................................................................................................... 21
Service LED/Power LED (orange/green) .................................................................................. 22
Standby LED (white) ................................................................................................................. 22
CONT UID LED (blue)............................................................................................................... 22
CONT Fault LED/CONT Ready LED (orange/green)................................................................ 22
FAN-Fault LED (orange) ........................................................................................................... 23
BBU-Fault LED (orange) ........................................................................................................... 23
PS Status LED (green/orange) ................................................................................................. 24
Maintenance Port/Management Port ....................................................................................... 25
CONT UID LED (blue)............................................................................................................... 25
HPE Ready LED/HPE Fault LED (green/orange) ..................................................................... 28
HP Link LED/HP Fault LED (green) .......................................................................................... 28
DPE Ready LED/DPE Fault LED (green/orange) ..................................................................... 29
DP Link LED/DP Fault LED (green/orange).............................................................................. 29
ID LED (blue) ............................................................................................................................ 30
Service LED/Power LED (orange/green) .................................................................................. 30
Standby LED (white) ................................................................................................................. 30
Active/Fault LED (green/orange) of Disk Drive ......................................................................... 30
LED Status for Disk Array Controller Power and Disk Enclosure Power .................................. 31
Status Display LED ................................................................................................................... 32
Disk Port Status ........................................................................................................................ 32
About Control Systems ............................................................................................................. 37
Components of Rack Mount Kit ................................................................................................ 51
FC Cable Length ....................................................................................................................... 63
iSCSI Cable Length................................................................................................................... 63
Operating Environment of Storage Manager Client .................................................................. 72
Operating Environment of Storage Manager Client (JRE and OS Combinations ..................... 74
Initialization Status of Disk Array .............................................................................................. 95
Optima3600 Optional Parts..................................................................................................... 194
Optional Parts For All Series................................................................................................... 196
Disk Drive Features................................................................................................................. 197
Relation between the initialization wizard and configuration settings ..................................... 213
Relation between the initialization wizard and configuration settings ..................................... 215
Trouble in Disk Array Unit (Front Panel LED Status) .............................................................. 218
Trouble in Disk Array Unit (Rear Panel Controller LED Status) .............................................. 220
Trouble in Disk Array Unit or Enclosure (Rear Panel Power LED Status) .............................. 221
Trouble in Disk Enclosure ....................................................................................................... 222
Wrong SAS Cable Connection................................................................................................ 223
Trouble in Linkup of Host Port................................................................................................. 224
Specifications - Disk Array ...................................................................................................... 253
Specifications - RAID Configurations ...................................................................................... 254
Operating Environment (Linux) ............................................................................................... 324
Open-iSCSI Driver Settings .................................................................................................... 342
Disk Array Controller - Front ................................................................................................... 385
Disk Array Controller - Back.................................................................................................... 386
xv
xvi
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing Bull's product.
This document is intended for users who have ability to build server systems and configure networks. The
following systems are supported:
 Supported connection servers and operating systems:

For details about Windows and Linux Storage Manager products, see Storage Manager User's
Manual, StoreWay Multipath User's Manual (Windows version), and StoreWay Multipath for
Linux User's Manual that come with the disk array unit.
 Supported configurations: Storage Area Network (SAN) configurations and Direct Attached Storage (DAS)
configurations including a recommended configuration shown in Figure 1: Example of Recommended
Configuration.
 Others: FC switches, network switches, and modems are not supported. They must be set up by
maintenance personnel.
This document is intended for use in a Windows or Linux environment.
For use in other OS environments, StoreWay disk array system must be set up by maintenance service
provider. Please contact your maintenance service provider.
This document provides a general setup method of StoreWay disk array system.
Before you start the setup, make sure to have products whose license sheets are shipped together with the
system and the license sheets ready.
xvii
User Guide
Figure 1: Example of Recommended Configuration
This document describes how to set up the StoreWay OptimaX600 series for the first time in the recommended
configuration illustrated in Figure i. For use in a different environment, modify the setup procedure as needed.
For details about software products, see manuals attached to the software products.
You may ask your maintenance service provider to perform the setup described in this document.
Remarks
This document provides information on functions achieved by the following program products:
 Storage Manager Express
 StoreWay Multipath
This document supports the following versions of the program products.
 Storage Manager Version 7.5 or later
 StoreWay Multipath 5.0 for Windows
 StoreWay Multipath 5.2 for Linux
If you are using a product of an older version, see the user's guide of the product.
Unless otherwise specified, 1 KB stands for 1024 bytes in this document.
Keep this document nearby as a handy reference.
xviii
Notes on use in countries other than Japan
This product, including software program, is an export control product designated by Export Trade Control
Order, which requires permission or any appropriate procedure for export from Japan. Contact your sales agent
or nearest Bull sales office if you need special material for the permission procedures.
In using this disk array system, inconvenience may occur when a temporary power failure due to
a cause such as lightning is experienced.
As a measure for temporary power failures, it is recommended to use devices such as AC
un-interruptible power supply units.
xix
User Guide
xx
About This Document
This chapter describes the terms and conventions used in this document. It also provides the references
required while reading about Storage Manager product.
Conventions in This Document
Table 1 lists the conventions used in this document.
Table 1: Conventions
Convention
Description
Provides information of particular importance in operation.

Provides supplementary information.
Provides information that advises users that failure to take or avoid a
specified action could result in loss of data.
Provides information that advises users that failure to take or avoid a
specific action could result in physical harm to the user or the
hardware.
Table 2 lists the terms used in this document.
Table 2: Terms Used
Term
Description
Disk array unit
Refers to a set configuration of DAC and DE. Or, if the DAC is
used alone, this denotes the DAC.
Disk Array Controller (DAC)
This is a unit that controls the disk array functions. This denotes
a configuration consisting of a DAC enclosure and a CONT.
Disk Enclosure (DE)
Refers to a unit that is connected to the DAC and used to expand
or add a disk drive.
Disk drive
Refers to a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid state drive (SDD)
with a dedicated carrier.
Dummy carrier
Refers to a dedicated dummy carrier, which is used when a disk
drive is not installed.
Host bus adapter (HBA)
Refers to a Fibre Channel (FC) controller.
Network Interface Card (NIC)
Refers to an interface control device connected to a client's LAN
port or an application server's Ethernet port.
Controller (CONT)
Refers to a controller in a DAC.
xxi
User Guide
Table 2: Terms Used (Contd.)
Term
Description
Power Supply (PS)
Refers to a power supply unit.
FC cable
Refers to a Fibre Channel cable.
FC switch
Refers to a Fibre Channel switch.
Physical Disk (PD)
Refers to a physical disk.
Document Organization
Table 3 shows the documentation organization.
Table 3: Document Organization
Chapter/ Appendix
Description
Chapter 1: "Overview"
This chapter describes features, components, and the basic
operation of this disk array system.
Chapter 2: “Workflow Installation to Operation”
This chapter explains the flow from the installation to operation of
this disk array system.
Chapter 3: “Installing the Disk
Array System”
This chapter explains how to install and connect this disk array
system.
Chapter 4: “Storage Manager”
This chapter explains Storage Manager used for managing this
disk array system.
Chapter 5: “Initializing a Disk
Array (FC)”
This chapter explains the initialization of this disk array system in
an FC environment.
Chapter 6: “Initializing a Disk
Array (iSCSI)”
This chapter explains the initialization of this disk array system in
an iSCSI environment.
Chapter 7: “Installing Optional
Parts”
This chapter describes the preparation and installation of the
optional parts of a disk array unit.
Chapter 8: “Changes to the
Configuration”
This chapter explains how to modify the configuration and the
settings of this disk array system.
Chapter 9: “Troubleshooting”
This chapter describes possible problems and how to solve
them.
Appendix A: "Specifications"
This appendix provides the specifications of the disk array.
Appendix B: “How to
Set/Check Application Server
(Windows) (FC)”
This appendix provides the steps you should follow while setting
or checking application server in the Windows environment,
when this disk array is configured for the FC connection.
Appendix C: “How to
Set/Check Application Server
(Windows) (iSCSI)”
This appendix provides the steps you should follow while setting
or checking application server in the Windows environment,
when this disk array is configured for the iSCSI connection.
Appendix D: "How to
Set/Check Application Server
(Windows) (iSCSI HW
Initiator)"
This appendix provides the steps you should follow while setting
or checking application server in the Windows environments,
when this disk array is configured for the iSCSI HW Initiator
connection.
xxii
Table 3: Document Organization (Contd.)
Chapter/ Appendix
Description
Appendix E: “How to
Set/Check Application Server
(Linux) (FC)”
This appendix provides the steps you should follow while setting
or checking application server in the Linux environment, when
this disk array is configured for the FC connection.
Appendix F: “How to
Set/Check Application Server
(Linux) (iSCSI)”
This appendix provides the steps you should follow while setting
or checking application server in the Linux environment, when
this disk array is configured for the iSCSI connection.
Appendix G: “How to
Set/Check Application Server
(VMware) (FC)”
This appendix provides a brief description about how to set or
check an application server in the VMware environment, when
this disk array is configured for the FC connection.
Appendix H: “How to
Set/Check Application Server
(VMware) (iSCSI)”
This appendix provides the steps you should follow while setting
or checking application server in the VMware environment, when
this disk array is configured for the iSCSI connection.
Appendix I: "Installing
StoreWay Multipath"
This appendix provides the steps you should follow for installing
StoreWay Multipath in a Windows or Linux environment.
Appendix H: "How to
Set/Check Application Server
(VMware) (iSCSI)"
Appendix J: “LED Inspection
Checksheet”
This appendix provides LED inspection checksheet.
Appendix K: “Notes-Using
iSCSI Supported Disk Array
Unit”
This appendix provides notes on using iSCSI supported disk
array unit.
Appendix I: “Installing
StoreWay Multipath”
This appendix provides the steps you should follow for installing
StoreWay Multipath in a Windows or Linux environment.
Appendix L: “iSCSI Connection
Configuration-Examples”
This appendix provides examples of iSCSI connection
configuration.
Appendix M: “Script for
Reporting Information
Registered with iSNS Server”
This appendix provides script for reporting information registered
with iSNS server.
Appendix N: “Retrieve Initiator
Information on Application
Servers Registered with iSNS
Server”
This appendix describes how to retrieve initiator information on
application servers registered with iSNS server.
Appendix O: “CHAP
Authentication”
This appendix describes the CHAP authentication and its
settings.
Appendix P: "Registering Host
Information Manually"
This appendix describes how to register host information
manually.
xxiii
User Guide
About Other Documents
In addition to this document, information is provided to customers through the following documents.
The information provided in these documents is important and necessary for installation and stable
operation. Make sure to check the documents as well.
Table 4: Reference Documents
Document
Description
Setup guide
This document is shipped together with this disk array system.
The document describes how to set up the disk array system.
Installation guide
This document is shipped together with this disk array system.
The document describes how to install the disk array system.
Storage Manager User's
Manual
This document provides information about basic functions for
using Storage Manager.
Storage Manager
Configuration Setting Tool
User's Manual (GUI)
for the OptimaX600 Series
This document provides information about how to set disk array
configurations and how to view configuration information by
using the Graphical User Interface (GUI).
Storage Manager Messages
Handbook
This document lists messages (error, warning, caution, and
information) displayed by Storage Manager in ID order and
actions to be taken for the messages.
Storage Manager Command
Reference
This document provides information about how to set disk array
configurations and how to view configuration information by
using the Command Line Interface (CLI).
StoreWay Multipath User's
Manual (Windows version)
This document describes how to use StoreWay Multipath
(Windows version).
StoreWay Multipath for Linux
User's Manual
This document describes how to use Storeway Multipath (Linux
version).
xxiv
About Warning Labels
Warning labels are attached to components that may be hazardous to their nearby areas. The labels are
intended for users to always be aware of any conceivable hazards when they use this disk array system.
Do not remove or damage the labels.
If any label is not attached, coming off, or unreadable, contact your sales agent or maintenance personnel.
xxv
User Guide
Disk Array Controller
The disk array unit might use two power supplies. When disconnecting
power, be sure to disconnect both the power supplies to prevent an
electrical shock.
xxvi
User Guide
Disposing of your used product
In the European Union
EU-wide legislation as implemented in each Member State requires that used electrical
and electronic products carrying the mark (left) must be disposed of separately from
normal household waste. This includes Disk Array Unit or electrical accessories, such
as cables or CDs.
When disposing of used products, you should comply with applicable legislation or
agreements you may have. The mark on the electrical and electronic products only
applies to the current European Union Member States.
Outside the European Union
If you wish to dispose of used electrical and electronic products outside the European
Union, please contact your local authority and ask for the correct method of disposal.
xxvii
User Guide
Controller (CONT)
xxviii
User Guide
HPE, DPE
The following illustration shows the label for HPE, DPE. The label is attached to the same location in
other modules.
xxix
User Guide
Power Supply
xxx
User Guide
Battery
xxxi
User Guide
Fan
xxxii
User Guide
Disk Enclosure
The disk enclosure might use two power supplies. When disconnecting
power, be sure to disconnect the two power supplies to prevent an
electrical shock.
xxxiii
User Guide
Power Cable
For overseas use, please use appropriate AC cord set, which is certified by the countries'
wiring rules.
xxxiv
Disposal of the Unit
This disk array system uses lithium batteries and nickel batteries.
The batteries are installed as follows:
Controller: lithium (button) battery (lithium cell)
BBU: Ni-MH (nickel metal hydride battery)
The unit must be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national regulations. Bull encourages
owners of informational technology (IT) equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer
needed.
xxxv
User Guide
xxxvi
Chapter 1 Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the Bull Storage Disk Array Unit.
In this chapter
“Features” on page 2
“Components” on page 3
“Basic Operation” on page 34
1
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
1.1 Features
The following describes features of this disk array unit.
1.1.1 High Performance and Large Capacity
 The following host interfaces are supported:
 Fibre channel (FC-AL/Fabric, 8Gbps)
 iSCSI (1Gbps, 10Gbps)
 SAS (6Gbps)
 The following disk drive types are supported:
 300 GB (15Krpm), 450 GB (15Krpm), 600 GB (15Krpm), encryption 600 GB (15Krpm), and 900
GB (10Krpm) 3.5 inch SAS disk drives
 300 GB (10Krpm), 450 GB (10Krpm), 600 GB (10Krpm), encryption 600 GB (10Krpm) 2.5 inch
SAS disk drives
 1 TB (7.2Krpm), 2 TB, and 3 TB (7.2Krpm) 3.5 inch NL-SAS disk drives
 1 TB (7.2Krpm) 2.5 inch NL-SAS disk drive
 100 and 400 GB 3.5 inch SSD
 100 and 400 GB 2.5 inch SSD
 Up to 384 disk drives (up to 96 disk drives per disk port) can be installed.
 SAS disk drives, NL-SAS disk drives and SSDs
 can be installed together on a disk enclosure.
 The disk array can be connected as a storage system for Blade, NovaScale, extreme computing,
and AIX servers.
1.1.2 High Reliability and High Availability
 Key components such as controllers, cache memories, power supplies and fans are redundantly
configured.
 Cache data is dually written to controllers. Even if a controller fails, integrity of the data on the
caches of the other controller is maintained.
 Data on caches is automatically saved in the internal flash memory by using the battery power
when a power outage occurs.
 The disk array supports RAID-1,5, 6, 10, 50, 60, and TM by default. Even if a disk drive fails,
operation can be continued without causing data loss.
 Multiple hot spare disks can be configured.
1.1.3 Operation Management
Storage Manager allows for basic configuration settings, status display and status monitoring easily.
Storage Manager Suite program product, which needs to be purchased separately, allows for
centralized management of multiple disk array units and using function extension programs.
2
User Guide
Overview
1.2 Components
1.2.1 Disk Array Controller
This section describes names and functions of disk array components.
For more details about LED lighting patterns, see Section 1.2.3: “LED Display”.
1.2.1.1 Appearance
(1) Disk array configuration (Perspective view)
Figure 1-1: Disk Array Configuration (Perspective View)
3
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
(2) Front view
Figure 1-2: Front View (Without Front Bezel)
Figure 1-3: Front View (With Front Bezel)
For information on removing the front bezel, see Section 7.3.1: “Front Bezel”.
4
User Guide
Overview
(3) Rear view
Figure 1-4: Configuration Example (Two FC 4-Port HPEs Installed)
Location name
Label
Description
(1) Basic enclosure
This is a cabinet in which disk array components
are installed.
(2) LED card
This shows the disk array status.
(3) CONT (Controller)
This is a unit that controls main disk array
functions. Two controllers are installed on a disk
array.
(4) BBU (Battery backup unit)
This provides power required to back up cache
data in case of power outage. Two battery backup
units are installed on a disk array.
(5) Fan
The fan is used to cool the components in a disk
array. Four fans are installed on a disk array.
5
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
Label
Description
(6) PS (Power supply)
The power supply provides power to the disk array.
Two power supplies are installed on a disk array.
(7) MNG (Management card)
The management card is used to control and
maintain a disk array. Two management cards are
installed on a disk array.
(8) HPE (Host port extension)
This is an interface between a disk array and host
machine. Two to four HPEs are installed on a disk
array.
(9) DPE (Disk Port Extension)
This is an interface between a disk array and
enclosures. Four DPEs are installed on a disk
array.
(10) DC button
This button is used to start or shut down the disk
array. There are two types of shutdown; normal
shutdown and forced shutdown. The disk array is
forcibly shut down by holding down this button for
eight or more seconds.
(11) Key cylinder
The key cylinder is used to lock the front bezel
when it is attached to the unit.
6
User Guide
Overview
1.2.1.2 CONT (Controller), BBU (Battery Backup Unit), and Fan
Figure 1-5: Controller Installed with BBUs and Fans
BBUs and fans are installed on a disk array. They can be replaced individually.
7
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
Figure 1-6: BBU
Figure 1-7: Fan
8
User Guide
Overview
1.2.1.3 PS (Power Supply)
Figure 1-8: Perspective View of Power Supply
Figure 1-9: Front View of Power Supply
9
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
1.2.1.4 MNG (Management Card)
Figure 1-10: Perspective View of Management Card
Figure 1-11: Front View of Management Card
10
User Guide
Overview
1.2.1.5 HPE (Host Port Extension)
(1) FC-HPE
Figure 1-12: Perspective View of FC-HPE
Figure 1-13: Front View of FC-HPE
11
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
(2) 1G-iSCSI-HPE
Figure 1-14: Perspective View of 1G-iSCSI-HPE
Figure 1-15: Front View of 1G-iSCSI-HPE
12
User Guide
Overview
(3) 10G-iSCSI-HPE
Figure 1-16: Perspective View of 10G-iSCSI-HPE
Figure 1-17: Front View of 10G-iSCSI-HPE
13
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
(4) SAS-HPE
Figure 1-18: Perspective View of SAS-HPE
Figure 1-19: Front View of SAS-HPE
14
User Guide
Overview
1.2.1.6 DPE (Disk Port Extension)
Figure 1-20: Perspective View of DPE
Figure 1-21: Front View of DPE
15
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
1.2.2 Disk Enclosure
This section describes names and functions of disk enclosure components.
1.2.2.1 Front View
Figure 1-22: 2.5 Inch Disk Drive Model
Figure 1-23: 3.5 Inch Disk Drive Model
Figure 1-24: Front Bezel (Option)
16
User Guide
Overview
For information on removing the front bezel, see Section 7.3.1: “Front Bezel”.
Figure 1-25: Disk Drive Front View
Label
Description
(1) ID LED (blue)
This LED is used to identify the unit.
(2) Service LED (orange)
These LEDs indicate the status of the disk array
controller.
(3) Power LED (green)
(4) Standby LED (white)
This LED indicates the DC off and on operation is
available.
(5) Disk drive/Dummy carrier
Up to 24 disk drives/dummy carriers can be
installed on the 2.5 inch disk drive model. Upto 12
disk drives/dummy carriers can be installed on the
3.5 inch disk drive model.
 Disk drive: Hard disk drive with a dedicated
carrier (HDD) or SSD.
 Dummy carrier: Dummy to prevent wind blow.
(6) Key cylinder
The key cylinder is used to lock the front bezel
when it is attached to the unit.
17
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
Label
Description
(7) Active LED (green)
Each disk drive has one each of these LEDs. The
LEDs indicate the disk drive status.
(8) Fault LED (orange)
(9) Ejector
The ejector is used to remove and attach the disk
drive from or to a disk array controller or a disk
enclosure.
1.2.2.2 Rear View
Figure 1-26: Disk Enclosure Rear View (with AC Power Supplies)
Label
Description
(1) Power supply (PS0/PS1)
Two power supplies are installed on a disk
enclosure.
(2) Adapter (ADP0/ADP1)
Two adapters are installed on a disk enclosure.
18
User Guide
Overview
1.2.2.3 Power Supply
Figure 1-27: Power Supply
Label
Description
(1) Power plug
Use the power cable shipped together with the disk
array for supplying power to the disk array.
(2) Power cable clamp
The power cable clamp prevents the power cable
from coming off unintentionally.
(3) Ejector
The ejector is used to install and remove a power
supply.
(4) AC switch
The AC switch is used to power on and off input of
power supply.
(5) Input Good LED (green)
This LED is lit if power is supplied when the AC
switch is turned on.
(6) Fault LED (orange)
This LED is lit when an error is detected.
(7) Service Action LED (blue)
This LED is not used in this disk array system. The
LED is not lit all the time.
(8) DC Good LED (green)
This LED is lit when DC output is normal.
(9) Standby Power Good LED (green)
This LED is lit when DC output is in the waiting
status.
19
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
1.2.2.4 Adapter
Figure 1-28: Adapter
Label
Description
(1) Maintenance port
This port is for maintenance. This port is not used
under normal conditions.
(2) ID configuration dial
The ID configuration dial is not used.
(3) ID display LED
The ID display LED is not used.
(4) LAN port
The LAN port is used for maintenance. It is not
used under normal operation.
(5) Status display LED
For details about the status display LED, see
Section 1.2.3: “LED Display”.
(6) Disk port (IN)
A disk port (IN) is used to connect the disk array
controller or disk enclosure located before the
given enclosure.
Each adapter has two disk ports for (IN). Typically,
only the right (IN) port is used.
Each port has a fault LED (right) and a link LED
(left).
(7) Disk port (OUT)
The disk port (OUT) is used to connect the disk
enclosure behind the given enclosure. Each
adapter has one disk port (OUT).
Each port has a fault LED (right) and a link LED
(left).
(8) Ejector
The ejector is used to attach and remove the
adapter.
20
User Guide
Overview
1.2.3 LED Display
1.2.3.1 Disk Array Controller: Front View
Figure 1-29: Disk Array Controller: Front View
Table 1-1: UID LED (blue)
(1) UID LED
Meaning
Not lit
Not selected
Lit
Selected
21
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
Table 1-2: Service LED/Power LED (orange/green)
(2) Service LED
(3) Power LED
Meaning
Not lit
Lit
Running successfully.
Lit
Lit
Maintenance being required or performed (such
as in the course of recovery)
Lit 0.2 seconds
Not lit 0.8 seconds
Lit
In the course of power on
Lit 4 seconds
Not lit 8 seconds
Lit
 Maintenance being required
 Processing a maintenance task (such as in
the course of recovery)
 Updating a chip-FW
Lit 1 second
Not lit 1 second
Lit
Firmware being update online.
Not lit
Lit 0.2 seconds
Not lit 0.2 seconds
Auto flushing (*) has finished and power can be
turned off.
Not lit
Not lit
Powered off.
When access to a host connection port is disconnected for five minutes, transition to this
mode takes place automatically to be prepared for power-off. When access from the host
connection port is restored, ordinary status is restored.
Table 1-3: Standby LED (white)
(4) Standby LED
Status
Not lit
DC on and off operation is not available.
Lit
DC on and off operation is available.
Table 1-4: CONT UID LED (blue)
(4) Standby LED
Status
Not lit
CONT not selected.
Lit
CONT selected.
Table 1-5: CONT Fault LED/CONT Ready LED (orange/green)
(6) CONT Fault LED
(7) CONT Ready LED
Status
Not lit
Lit 1 second
Not lit 1 second
Running successfully.
Not lit
Blinking fast
Shutting down or backing up data in the
memory.
Not lit
Lit
Starting up or rebooting.
22
User Guide
Overview
(6) CONT Fault LED
(7) CONT Ready LED
Status
Lit 1 second
Not lit 1 second
Lit
Waiting for the disk enclosure to be
powered on.
Lit
Lit
Failure has occurred.
Lit
Blinking fast
Failure has occurred (log collectable).
Lit
Lit 1 second
Not lit 1 second
Retrying as disk enclosure shortage has
been detected.
Disk Port blocked.
Blinking fast
Lit 1 second
Not lit 1 second
Updating firmware online.
Table 1-6: FAN-Fault LED (orange)
(4) Standby LED
Status
Not lit
Running successfully.
Lit
Failure
Table 1-7: BBU-Fault LED (orange)
(4) Standby LED
Status
Not lit
Running successfully.
Lit
Detected BBU failure.
Blinking
Warning for the end of the BBU life cycle
23
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
1.2.3.2 Disk Array Controller: PS (Power Supply)
Figure 1-30: Disk Array Controller: PS (Power Supply)
Table 1-8: PS Status LED (green/orange)
(1) PS Status LED
Status
Not lit
No AC-Power
AC power is not provided to the power supply.
Lit in orange
Fault (Critical)
Lit in orange 0.5 seconds
Not lit 0.5 seconds
Fault (Warning)
Lit in green 0.5 seconds
Not lit 0.5 seconds
AC-ON, DC output OFF
Indicates the disk array controller DC-OFF state.
Lit in green 0.5 seconds
AC-ON, DC output ON
Indicates the disk array controller DC-ON state.
Lit in orange
AC input disconnected
When the AC input is disconnected, the PS Status LED is lit in orange
about for 30 seconds, and then enters No AC-Power.
Even if AC input is fed again in this status,
DC is not output. Therefore, disconnect
AC input, and then provide AC input again
when LED went out.
24
User Guide
Overview
1.2.3.3 Disk Array Controller: MNG
Figure 1-31: Disk Array Controller: MNG
Table 1-9: Maintenance Port/Management Port
LED
Status
(1) Maintenance port Link/Active LED (Green)
(3) Management port Link LED (Green)
Lit = connected
Blinking = data is being transferred
(2) Maintenance port Speed LED (Green/orange)
(4) Management port Active LED (Green/orange)
Lit in orange = link speed is 1Gbps
Lit in green = link speed is 100Mbps
Not lit = link speed is 10Mbps
Table 1-10: CONT UID LED (blue)
(5) CONT UID LED
Status
Not lit
CONT not selected
Lit
CONT selected
The function of CONT UID LED on the management card is the same as that of CONT
UID LED on the front of the disk array controller.
25
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
1.2.3.4 Disk Array Controller: HPE
(1) FC-HPE
Figure 1-32: Disk Array Controller: FC-HPE
(2) 1G-iSCSI-HPE
Figure 1-33: Disk Array Controller: 1G-iSCSI-HPE
26
User Guide
Overview
(3) 10G-iSCSI-HPE
Figure 1-34: Disk Array Controller: 10G-iSCSI-HPE
(4) SAS-HPE
27
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
Figure 1-35: Disk Array Controller: SAS-HPE
Table 1-11: HPE Ready LED/HPE Fault LED (green/orange)
(1) HPE Ready LED
(2) HPE Fault LED
Meaning
Lit 1 second
Not lit 1 second
Not lit
Running successfully.
Not lit
Lit
Failure
Lit
Lit 1 second
Not lit 1 second
Updating chip firmware
(Only 10G-iSCSI HPE and 1G-iSCSI HPE)
Table 1-12: HP Link LED/HP Fault LED (green)
LED
Status
(3) HP Link LED (Green)
Lit = linkup
Not lit = link down
(4) HP Access LED (Green)
Lit or blinking during I/O access
(3) and (4) blinking at the same time
Every two seconds = offline
Every one second = being powered off
Other = invalid port settings
1.2.3.5 Disk Array Controller: DPE
28
User Guide
Overview
Figure 1-36: Disk Array Controller: DPE
Table 1-13: DPE Ready LED/DPE Fault LED (green/orange)
(1) DPE Ready LED
(2) DPE Fault LED
Meaning
Lit 1 second
Not lit 1 second
Not lit
Running successfully.
Not lit
Lit
Failure
Table 1-14: DP Link LED/DP Fault LED (green/orange)
LED
Status
(3) DP Link LED (Green)
Lit = linkup
Not lit = link down
(4) DP Fault LED (orange)
Lit = An error is detected
Not lit= Normal
1.2.3.6 Disk Array Controller, Disk Enclosure, and Disk Drives
The front view of a disk array controller, a disk enclosure and disk drives (without the front bezel).
Figure 1-37: LED Display - Disk Array Unit, Disk Enclosure, and Disk Drives
29
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
Table 1-15: ID LED (blue)
(1) ID LED
Status
Not lit
Not selected
Lit
Selected
Table 1-16: Service LED/Power LED (orange/green)
(2) Service LED
(3) Power LED
Meaning
Not lit
Lit
Running successfully.
Lit
Lit
Maintenance being required or being performed
(such as in the course of recovery).
Lit 1second
Not lit 1second
Lit
In the course of power on.
Firmware being updated online.
Lit 4 seconds
Not lit 8 seconds
Lit
Maintenance being required (Backup has failed.
Written data may have vanished.)
Not lit
Lit 0.2 seconds
Not lit 0.2 seconds
Auto flushing (*) has finished and power can be
turned off.
Not lit
Not lit
Powered off.
When access to a host connection port is disconnected for five minutes, transition to this
mode takes place automatically to be prepared for power-off. When access from the host
connection port is restored, ordinary status is restored.
Table 1-17: Standby LED (white)
(4) Standby LED
Status
Not lit
DC on and off operation is not available
Lit
DC on and off operation is available
Table 1-18: Active/Fault LED (green/orange) of Disk Drive
(5) Active LED
(6) Fault LED
Status
Not lit
Not lit
Powered off.
Lit
Not lit
Ordinary (READY)
Flashing
Not lit
Ordinary (in the course of ACCESS)
Flashing
Flashing
Recovered
Lit
Flashing
Hard disk drive save-energy mode
Lit
Lit
Failure
30
User Guide
Overview
1.2.3.7 Disk Array Controller Power and Disk Enclosure Power
Figure 1-38: LED Display - Disk Array Controller Power and Disk Enclosure Power
Table 1-19: LED Status for Disk Array Controller Power and Disk Enclosure Power
(1)
Input
good
LED
(2) Fault
LED
(3)
Service
action
LED
(4) DC
good
LED
(5)
Standby
good
LED
Green
orange
Blue
Green
Green
Status
Lit
Not lit
-
Lit
-
Running successfully.
Lit
Lit
-
Lit
-
Problem in power supply fan.
Power supply temperature warning.
Lit
Lit
-
Not lit
-
Power supply output problem.
Power supply temperature problem.
Lit
-
-
-
Lit
INPUT-ON (12V and 5V no output,
5Vstb output).
Not lit
-
-
-
-
Input problem.
The service action LED is lit when directed by a device connected to a port or the system.
31
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
1.2.3.8 Adapter (ADP)
Figure 1-39: LED Display - Disk Array Enclosure Adapter
Table 1-20: Status Display LED
(1) Ready
LED
(2) Fault LED
(3) ID LED
Green
orange
Blue
Status
Not lit
Not lit
-
Not connected or, not powered on.
Flashing
Not lit
-
Running successfully.
Flashing
Flashing in a
cycle of 0.5
second
-
Initializing firmware.
Flashing
Flashing in a
cycle of 1
second
-
Error between adapters has been detected.
Flashing
Lit
-
Error in the adapter has been detected. (Operation
continued)
Not lit
Lit
-
Error in the adapter has been detected. (Unable to
continue operation)
-
-
Lit
The device is selected.
Table 1-21: Disk Port Status
Disk port
Status
(4) Link LED (LNK) (Green)
Lit = linkup
Not lit = link down
(5) Fault LED (FLT) (orange)
Lit = An error is detected
Not lit= Normal
32
User Guide
Overview
Location and port number
DP1-IN is not used under normal operation.
33
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
1.3 Basic Operation
1.3.1 Powering On the Disk Array System
1.3.1.1 AC Operating Mode
The disk array unit has a mechanism that powers the unit itself on automatically, not through operation
of the power switch, according to power supply to AC.
AC operating mode is enabled in the factory default settings. AC operating mode can be disabled by
using the disk array unit management software. When AC operating mode is disabled, you need to use
the power switch to control the power of the disk array unit.
When AC operating mode is disabled, the power control function through
ESMPRO/AC is not available because the control circuits on the controllers
are not powered on. Make sure to enable AC operating mode when you use
the power control function through the ESMPRO/AC.
For information on how to change the factory default settings to disable AC operating mode, see
Storage Manager Configuration Setting Tool User’s Manual (GUI) for the OptimaX600 Series.
34
User Guide
Overview
1.3.1.2 Powering On the Disk Array System
Follow the steps below to power on the disk array system:
Step
Operation
0
Check the disk array controller and the disk enclosures are connected correctly.
In this step, do not connect the power supply input cable to the disk array controller or
power on the disk array unit.
1
Connect the power supply input cable to the units, in the order of the disk enclosure and
the disk array controller, or power on the units at the same time or in the order of the
disk enclosure and the disk array controller.
When AC operating mode is enabled (factory default settings), the disk array
system with AC power supplies is automatically powered on at the time the
power supply input cable is connected to the disk array controller or the disk
array unit is powered on. Disk enclosures are sequentially powered on in
association with the disk array controller. Proceed to step 3.
If AC operating mode is disabled, proceed to step 2, otherwise proceed to
step 3.
2
Step 2 should be performed only when AC operating mode is disabled.
Press the power button of a controller (CONT), which is located at the front of the disk
array controller, for approximately one second until fans start to rotate, by using the
attached stick. The disk array controller will be powered on. The disk enclosures will be
powered on sequentially as the disk array controller is powered on.
Proceed to step 3.
You do not need to press buttons of both controllers.
Do not press the power buttons for 8 seconds or more,
unless you have special instructions because power is
forcefully turned off, which may give negative impact on
the disk array system.
35
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
Step
Operation
3
Do not operate the disk array system until the Power LED (green) located at the front of
the disk array unit is lit and the Service LED (orange) goes off after cyclic flashing.
 It takes approximately six (for minimum configuration) to eight (maximum
configuration) minutes for initialization and the self test after the power on.
During this period, the Service LED (orange) flashes cyclically.
 If the Service LED (orange) does not go off and the Power LED (green) is
not lit after 10 minutes (both LEDs are located at the front of the disk array
unit), the disk array system may be failing.
See Chapter 9, "Troubleshooting" .
 If the snapshot function or the data replication function is used,
initialization and the self test described above take longer.
4
Power on the application servers (hosts).
Make sure to power on the application servers after the disk array system is
successfully started.
1.3.1.3 Notes on Powering On the Disk Array System
1. When powered on from the battery backup status
If the disk array system stopped due to an unexpected power outage, backed up cache data to the
internal flash memory, and then restarted, high-speed writing by using cache (Cache Fast Write) will
not be performed until charging the batteries used for the backup is complete, which makes
performance of the disk array system degrade. This is because next backup is not guaranteed while
batteries are not fully charged, and data is written to nonvolatile disk drives but not to caches that
may get volatilized.
It takes a maximum of eight hours to complete charging discharged batteries.
2. Restarting the disk array system after user data loss
If a loss of data in caches has been experienced and then the disk array controller is powered on,
the Service LED on the disk array unit repeats flashing for four seconds and then not lit for eight
seconds. Follow the steps below to start the disk array system.
Step
Operation
1
Perform power off according to the steps in Section 1.3.2: “Powering Off the Disk
Array System”.
2
Perform power on according to the steps in Section 1.3.1: “Powering On the Disk
Array System”.
 If the disk array system does not start up successfully, it may be failing.
 Performance of the disk array system degrades until battery charging is
complete, which takes a maximum of eight hours.
36
User Guide
Overview
3. When the snapshot function is used
If the snapshot function is used, updated information is copied from disk drives to the cache
memory when the disk array unit is started.
Because of this, the disk array unit’s start up time is delayed by 10 seconds per 1 TB of the updated
information.
1.3.1.4 Power control systems without using power switches
1. Control Systems
Table 1-22: About Control Systems describes power control systems that do not use power
switches.
Table 1-22: About Control Systems
Control system
Host OS
Feature
ESMPRO/AC
(Works together with UPS)
Windows
Linux
This control system uses a server for power
control, which can be associated with hosts.
For details, see ESMPRO/AC manual.
ESMPRO/AC
(Automatic operation)
Windows
Linux
This control system uses a server for power
control and allows for automatic operation.
For details, see ESMPRO/AC manual.
UPS
(Does not work with UPS)
Not specified
This control system is for instantaneous power
interruption.
Because there is no association, when the
retention period of UPS elapses, temporary
power-off followed by reboot takes place.
Cached data, however, is protected.
Association is a mechanism to notify the disk array system of interruption of power
supply to the UPS and to start shutdown.
 If you use the UPS control system, establish redundancy by providing a UPS for
each power supply of a device.
 Make sure that a failure of a single UPS does not cause simultaneous power failure
of PS0 and PS1.
2. Notes on using a UPS and automatic operation
Where ESMPRO/AC association is used together with the disk array system, power must be turned
off in a certain order.
AC power off sequence
1 Application server → 2 FC switch → 3 Disk array unit → 4 Disk enclosure → 5 Management
server (Only ESMPRO/AC)
If multiple disk enclosures are used, you do not need to specify the sequence of power off among
the disk enclosures.
37
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
Figure 1-40: AC Power Off Sequence (FC Port Connection)
38
User Guide
Overview
1.3.2 Powering Off the Disk Array System
1.3.2.1 Powering Off the Disk Array System
Follow the steps below to power off the disk array system:
Step
Operation
1
Stop or power off application servers (hosts).
Make sure to check application servers (hosts) are stopped or powered off.
2
Press the power button of a controller (CONT) located at the front of the disk array unit
by using the attached stick. Then confirm that the Service LED starts to flash rapidly.
Press the power button of either of the controllers (CONT). You do not need
to press buttons of both controllers.
3
Wait for the Power LED (green) located at the front of the disk array unit to go off.
 With this process, the disk array unit writes data that is on caches and has
not been written to disks to disks.
When writing the data is complete, the disk array system is automatically
powered off.
 If the Power LED (green) located at the front of the disk array unit does
not go off after 10 minutes, the disk array system may be failing.
See Chapter 9, "Troubleshooting" .
4
The power supply of the disk array system can now be stopped.
Unlike power on, there is no rules for sequence of stopping.
1.3.2.2 Notes on Turning Off the AC Power
1. Backing up user data
If the power of this disk array system is turned off without going through the power off procedure
described in Section 1.3.2: “Powering Off the Disk Array System”, or the power control systems
without using power buttons section described in Section 1.3.1: “Powering On the Disk Array
System”, the user data on caches will be backed up on the flash memory of the unit.
Data will not be lost even if the power is turned off without going through the procedures.
39
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
2. Notes on using the data replication function
The update information (= storage system information) managed by the data replication function
(DynamicDataReplication or RemoteDataReplication) is created on a replication reserved volume
or the cache memory.
If no replication reserved volume has been created, the update information mentioned above is
created only on the cache memory. In these circumstances, even if the disk array system is
powered off according to the procedure described in Section 1.3.2: “Powering Off the Disk Array
System”, the status of the disk array system becomes backup status when the disk array system is
stopped. If the backup fails, the storage system information is lost and the status of the disk array
system becomes one of the following six statuses.
Activity
Synchronization
Pair Status
Separate
Separated
All spaces are different. There is no change in
the status.
Separating
The status becomes fault, where copying is
stopped.
Replicating
All spaces are different. Replication is
automatically restarted from the beginning.
There is no change in the status.
Replicate
Synchronized
Restore
Restoring
The status becomes fault, where copying is
stopped.
Synchronized
All spaces are different. Replication is
automatically restarted from the beginning.
There is no change in the status.
40
User Guide
Overview
For recovery of a pair whose status is fault, perform the following steps for replication.
a. Perform Forced Separate for the RV target.
b. Perform the steps to restore the previous status (Replicate → Separate, or Restore) again.
Copy is started again. All the spaces of logical disks are targeted, which means full
copy is performed.
 When the replication function is used, it is strongly recommended that a user use
the storage system information saving function and create a replication reserved
volume by Storage Manager. The capacity of the replication reserved volume will
be 8.0 GB.
 Powering off by performing the ordinary steps backs up storage system
information (differential map, etc.) in a replication reserved volume. If the disk
array system is powered off while no replication reserved volume has been
created, the state of the disk array system becomes backup. If no replication
reserved volume is used, it is recommended to power on the unit 24 hours.
The storage system information saving function is a function to back up the storage
system information such as differential map for business volumes (MV) and
replication volumes (RV) to disk drives.
1.3.2.3 Auto Cache Flush Function
This is a function to automatically save user data, difference map, configuration information and the
like on caches to disk drives when host IO is not issued for five minutes.
If power off takes place without going through the ordinary procedure while data that has not been
written is left on caches, the backup function works to protect the data on caches. However, because
this backup function saves cached data in the flash memory by using batteries in the disk array
system, the data may get lost if battery power is not sufficient and saving data fails.
Auto Cache Flush Function assures data on caches to be written to disk drives and prevents data loss
even if a situation mentioned above arises.
Completion of Auto Cache Flush can be checked from high-speed flashing of POWER LED that
flashes every 0.2 seconds.
41
Chapter 1 Overview
User Guide
42
Chapter 2 Workflow - Installation to Operation
This chapter explains the flow of disk array unit from installation to operation.
1
Disk Array Unit Installation
1. Installation Preparation

Prepare the following:

Machines - Client machine to run the Storage Manager client and the
application server.

Cables - LAN cable (shielded), interface cables (FC and/or iSCSI), and
power supply cable.

IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway addresses for the disk array unit.

Network devices (as necessary).

Disk drives.

Tools and accessories like Phillips screwdriver and installation CDs.
 Perform the preliminary setup of the application server.
See Section 3.1: "Preparation"
2. Hardware Installation

Install disk array unit in the rack.

Install disk enclosure in the rack.
 Install disk drive.
See Section 3.2: "Installation"
3. Cable Connections
Connect the following cables:

SAS cable to connect disk array unit and disk enclosure.

FC cable to connect disk array unit and application server (for FC).

LAN cable or optical Ethernet cable to connect disk array unit and application
server (for iSCSI).

LAN cable to connect disk array unit, application server, and client.

Power supply cable to connect disk enclosure to power supply.
 Power supply cable to connect disk array unit to power supply.
See Section 3.3: "Connection"
43
Chapter 2 Workflow - Installation to Operation
2
User Guide
Software Installation and Configuration
Perform the following installation and configuration settings:
1. Pre-requisites
 Configure the web browser to start Storage Manager client (Web GUI).
See Section 4.2: "Before Starting Storage Manager Client"
2. Setup

Install Network Setting Tool on Storage Manager client machine.

Configure the IP address of the disk array using Network Setting Tool.
 Set the time zone of the disk array.
See Section 4.3: "Setup"
3. Storage Manager Agent Utility
 Install the Storage Manager Agent Utility on an application server.
See Section 4.4: "Installing Storage Manager Agent Utility on Application Server"
4. Storage Manager Client

Enter the name or IP address of the disk array in the address bar of the web
browser to start the Storage Manager client.
See Section 4.5: "Starting Storage Manager Client"
44
User Guide
3
Chapter 2 Workflow - Installation to Operation
Disk Array Unit Initialization
Perform the following initialization methods based on how the disk array is configured:

If the disk array is configured for only FC connection, initialize it using FC method.

If the disk array is configured for only iSCSI connection, initialize it using iSCSI
method.

If the disk array is configured for both FC and iSCSI connection, then perform one
of the following methods:

Use the FC method to initialize the disk array and then use the iSCSI method.

Use the iSCSI method to initialize the disk array and then use the FC method.
Initialize using FC method
Initialize using iSCSI method
1. Collect host information from the
1. Initialize disk array using the
application server.
See Section 5.2: "Collecting Host
Information From Application
Servers"
2. Initialize disk array using the
Storage Manager.
a. Start the Initialization Wizard
and follow the instructions.
b. Bind Pool.
c. (Optional) Bind Hot Spare.
d. Bind Logical Disk.
e. Set the application server (host)
to which logical disk will be
assigned.
f. Assign logical disk to the
application server.
See Section 5.3: "Initialization by
Storage Manager"
3. Check if the application server to
which the logical disk has been
assigned is connected to the disk
array.
See Section 5.4: "Checking
Connection from Application
Servers"
45
Storage Manager.
a. Start the Initialization Wizard
and follow the instructions.
b. Perform iSCSI initiator setting
on the application server using
iSCSI Setup Tool.
c. Bind Pool.
d. (Optional) Bind Hot Spare.
e. Bind Logical Disk.
f. Assign logical disk to the
application server.
See Section 6.2: "Initialization by
Storage Manager"
2. Check if the application server to
which the logical disk has been
assigned is connected to the disk
array.
Chapter 2 Workflow - Installation to Operation
User Guide
46
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
This chapter describes how to prepare, install, and connect a disk array unit.
In this chapter
“Preparation” on page 48
“Installation” on page 51
“Connection” on page 63
47
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
User Guide
3.1 Preparation
The following accessories and tools are required for setup. Also the following preparation must to be
completed for the application servers to which a disk array unit will be connected.
1. Prepare the following items:
 Application servers, client, installation DVD-ROM
 LAN cables (shielded)
 Use a crossover cable to connect a unit and a client directly.
 Use straight cables to connect a unit and a client via hub, etc.
 Interface cables to connect application servers
 IP addresses to be assigned to the disk array unit as many as ports to be connected
Also contact the network administrator to obtain subnet masks and gateway addresses.
 Network devices (as necessary)
 Phillips screwdriver (No. 1) (for screwing)
 Three or more disk drives. Purchase new disk drive products
It is recommended to move a unit by two or more persons.
2. Implement the following setup preliminarily on the application server to which the disk array unit will
be connected:
48
User Guide
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
Figure 3-1: Flow of Preliminary Setups
For FC Interface
a. Retrieve World Wide Port Name (WWPNs) assigned to host bus adapters (FC controllers).
This setup procedure is applicable only when WWN mode (WWPNs of host bus adapters are
used to assign to LUNs to application servers) is set for AccessControl. During the setup, the
WWPNs of the host bus adapters attached to the application servers are retrieved by using
software. It is recommended to make a note of the WWPNs (i.e. checking the host bus adapter
locations at the server extension slots and taking a note of the WWPNs) because they will be
useful for replacement (for checking the host bus adapters location at the server extension slot
and the WWPN) if the host bus adapter fails.
In case the WWPNs of the host bus adapters cannot be retrieved by using software, you may
need to enter the WWPNs manually.
b. Attach the host bus adapters.
Skip this step when host bus adapters have already been attached to the application servers.
Attach the host bus adapters to the application servers by following the user's manuals of the
host bus adapters and the application servers.
c. Install the host bus adapter drivers.
Skip this step when the drivers of the host bus adapters attached to the application servers have
already been installed and set up on the application servers.
Install and set up the drivers by following the setup procedures described in the manuals that
come with the host bus adapter products to be installed on the servers or the information offered
on the Web sites.
d. Install StoreWay Multipath (Windows/Linux).
49
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
User Guide
Skip this step when StoreWay Multipath has already been installed and set up on the application
servers or no Storage Multipath will be installed.
Complete step c before implementing step d.
For information about how to install Storage Multipath, see Appendix I: "Installing StoreWay
Multipath".
50
User Guide
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
3.2 Installation
3.2.1 Mounting a Disk Array Unit on a Rack
This section describes how to install a disk array unit and a disk enclosure in a rack.
 Follow the descriptions in Installation Guide.
 A disk array unit weighs up to 39Kg (when 3.5-inch hard disk drives are installed). A
disk enclosure weighs up to 29Kg (when 3.5-inch disk drives are installed).
They must be mounted on a rack by two or more persons.
 Mount a disk array unit and then a disk enclosures from the bottom of a rack.
3.2.2 Mounting a Disk Enclosure on a Rack
The following describes how to attach the rack mount kit that has come with this disk array system to a
rack:
Table 3-1: Components of Rack Mount Kit
No.
Component name
Quantity
1
Rail (L)
1
2
Rail (R)
1
3
M5 screw
12
4
Cable clamp
4
5
Repeat tie
5
51
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
User Guide
Figure 3-2: Rack Mount Kit
1. Check the rail (L)
The side with the inner is rear.
The rail (L) looks L-shaped when it is seen from the front side.
Attach the rail to the left side of the rack which is seen from its front side.
Figure 3-3: Rail
2. Align both sides of the bottom of the rail with the 1U delimiting marks on the rear pole of the rack
and then let the two projections on the inner into the holes on the pole.
52
User Guide
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
Figure 3-4: Attaching Rail to Rear Pole
3. Align both side of the bottom of the rail with the 1U delimiting marks on the front pole of the rack and
let the two projections on the rail into the holes on the pole.
There are two types of rack, rectangular-hole rack and circular-hole rack. Each of them has a
different type of projection on the rail.
Insert M5 screws into the two central screw holes on the front pole of the rack to screw the rail.
Figure 3-5: Screwing Rail on Front Pole
4. Move the inner towards the rear pole of the rack and let the two projections in the holes on the pole.
53
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
User Guide
Figure 3-6: Attaching Rail to Rear Pole
5. Insert an M5 screw through a cable clamp into each of two screw holes on the rear pole of the rack
to screw the inner.
Orient cable clamps as shown in the figure on the right when attaching them.
54
User Guide
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
Figure 3-7: Attaching Inner Rail
6. Attach the rail (R) on the right side of the rack by using the same procedure as above.
Installation of rack mount kit is now complete.
7. Before mounting a unit, attach ear bezels or front bezel clips. If you use an optional front bezel,
attach the bezel clips that come with the front bezel as shown in the following illustration. If no front
bezel is used, attach the ear bezels that come with the unit.
Both can be attached to the unit by sliding from the side of the unit.
55
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
User Guide
Figure 3-8: Attaching Ear Bezels or Front Bezel Clips
56
User Guide
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
8. Mount the unit. Put the front part of the unit on the front part of the rack.
Then lift up the unit, put the rear part of the unit on the rail and slide the rail.
 Mounting a unit on a rack should be implemented by two or more
persons.
 Take care not to injure your fingers, etc. when moving a unit because it
is heavy.
 Take care not to drop a unit when moving it.
9. Secure the unit on the front side of the rack.
Screw two points on each of the right and left sides of the front side of the unit by using M5 screws.
Mounting the unit on the rack is now complete.
Figure 3-9: Securing Unit 1
57
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
User Guide
Figure 3-10: Securing Unit 2
.
58
User Guide
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
3.2.3 Installing Disk Drives
Follow the procedure below.
1. When a front bezel has been attached, detach it.
2. Remove dummy carriers from the slots where disk drives will be installed.
3. Mount disk drives. (For the detailed procedure, see the next page.)
4. Repeat steps (2) and (3) as many times as the number of disk drives you want to install.
 Insert a disk drive slowly because it has a plug-in structure.
 Mount disk drives carefully, one by one.
When the power is on, confirm that an inserted disk drive becomes
READY state before inserting the next disk drive.
 Use a new disk drive you have purchased as a product.
The operation of a diverted or a reused disk drive is not guaranteed. Do
not use a disk drive that has been diverted from or used in other system.
 For more information on how to attach/detach a front bezel, see Section
7.3.1: “Front Bezel”.
 Disk drives are electrical parts. When handling them, take an anti-static
measure such as using a wrist strap.
 Disk drives are precision machines. Protect them from any shock or
vibration.
 When replacing a disk drive with a new drive, confirm that both of them
have the same model number.
 Install dummy carriers for cooling the unit in the slots where disk drives
are not installed.
 Three disk drives that will serve as system disks always need to be
installed on the slots 00, 01, and 02 of the first disk enclosure (DE00).
 When 3.5 inch disk drives are used, place system disk labels that come
with the disk drives on the system disks to prevent operation errors. Also,
place location labels on disk drives to prevent a wrong disk drive from
being installed during drive replacement (when 3.5-inch hard disk drives
are installed).
 Remove system disks from the unit one by one.
59
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
User Guide
Figure 3-11: Attaching Location Label
Procedure for Removing a Dummy Carrier
Pull the eject lever on a dummy carrier until the angle is about 40 degrees.
Pull out the dummy carrier straight to the direction as the arrows in the following illustration shows.
Put back the eject lever to the original position after removing the dummy carrier.
60
User Guide
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
Figure 3-12: Removing Dummy Carrier
Do not dispose of the dummy carriers you removed.
There are two types of disk drive, 3-5-inch and 2.5-inch.
Each of them has three types, SAS drive, NL-SAS drive, and SSD.
The front label on a disk drive (shown by red circles on the figures below) indicates the type of the
drive.
Figure 3-13: Disk Drive
Procedure for Mounting a Disk Drive
1. Pull the eject lever on a disk drive until the angle is about 40 degrees.
The eject lever is closed by default on the disk drive.
61
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
User Guide
2. Hold the disk drive steadily and insert it to the middle of the slot in the disk drive unit or a disk
enclosure.
Figure 3-14: Inserting Disk Drive
3. With the eject lever on the disk drive open, slowly insert the disk drive until it stops while holding the
eject lever.
4. Press the eject lever into the disk drive to lock the drive.
62
User Guide
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
3.3 Connection
3.3.1 Overview
Check the following before connecting the disk array unit:
1. Connection cables
 To connect the disk array unit and a disk enclosure, be sure to use the cables that come with the
disk enclosure or SAS cables specified by Bull.
 (For FC) To connect a host bus adapter or FC switch on an application server to the disk array
unit, be sure to use an FC cable specified by Bull.
 (For 1Gbps iSCSI) To connect an NIC or switch on an application server to the disk array unit, be
sure to use a LAN cable in the category 5e or over.
 (For 10Gbps iSCSI) To connect an NIC or switch on an application server to the disk array unit,
be sure to use an optical Ethernet cable (conforming to 10GBASE-SR).
 To connect the disk array to power supply, use the power supply cables that come with the disk
array unit.
2. Maximum cable length
a. FC cable
Table 3-2: FC Cable Length
Host Interface
Max. Cable Length
Remarks
2 Gbps
300 m
Optical cable
4 Gbps
150 m
Optical cable
8 Gbps
50 m
Optical cable
b. iSCSI cable
Table 3-3: iSCSI Cable Length
Host Interface
Max. Cable Length
Remarks
1 Gbps
100 m
1000BASE-T
10 Gbps
50 m (*1)
Optical cable
Connector: LC-LC
Core: 50 um
Type: MMF/OM2 cable
(All mode excitation
bandwidth: 1500 MHz.km)
* 1. Connection of 50m or more is possible depending on the devices to be
connected. For more information, contact the technical division of Bull.
63
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
User Guide
To prevent a wrong cable from being connected during cable replacement at the
system start or after a failure, attach the cable labels that come with units on to the
cables.
3.3.2 Connecting a Disk Enclosure
If you have purchased a disk enclosure optionally, use SAS cables to connect the disk array unit and
the disk enclosure.
For details about how to connect them, see Section 7.3.4: “Disk Enclosures”.
3.3.3 Connecting an Application Server
For FC Port Connection
Use FC cables, to connect an application server and host connection ports on the disk array unit.
The figure below shows an example of recommended connection, which is a redundant-paths
configuration that works together with StoreWay Multipath.
To implement this recommended connection, two host bus adapters need to be installed on the
application server.
Two FC cables are also required for connecting the disk array unit and the host bus adapters.
Figure 3-15: Connection Example
The dustproof covers on the host port on the controllers will be required for system
relocation, etc. in the future. Do not dispose of the covers after removing them from the
controllers.
Following is the procedure for connecting the disk array unit and the application server by using FC
cables:
64
User Guide
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
1. Check the power.
Make sure the power of the disk array unit is off.
2. Connect the application server.
Insert the connector on one end of an FC cable (LC-LC cable) into a host connection port (HPx) on
the controller (CONT0 or CONT1) in the disk array unit until the connector clicks. The connectors on
both ends of an FC cable have the same shape.
Connect the connecter on the other end of the FC cable to the connecter of a host bus adapter
installed on the application server. In the same way, connect the other controller to the connector on
another host bus adapter.
If you press an FC-cable connector hard when inserting it, the end face of
the cable may be scratched and light output may be decreased, which
may cause malfunction.
For iSCSI Port Connection
See the "Preparation" section in one of the following sections:
 Section C.1: Initializing Application Server (on Windows)
 Section E.1: Installing Storage Manager Agent Utility (on Linux)
 Section G: How to Set/Check Application Server (VMware) (FC) (on VMware)
3.3.4 Connecting LAN Cables
Use a LAN cable to connect the disk array unit, servers and the clients to a LAN. The disk array and
the client must be connected to a LAN for initialization and monitoring of the disk array unit.
Use Storage Manager as software for initializing and monitoring the disk array unit. The Storage
Manager is requisite for using the disk array unit.
Purchase shielded LAN cables and connect them to the management ports (LAN ports) on the
controllers.
Figure 3-16: Example of LAN Cable Connection
65
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
User Guide
Storage Manager Server can be connected to CONT0 and 1. When it is connected to either of them,
connect it to CNT0 in general. It is recommended to employ a redundant configuration where an IP
address is set for the LAN port on each controller and connection via an Ethernet hub is set.
To initialize the disk array unit by using the initialization wizard on Storage
Manager, the disk array unit and the client need to be connected by using a
LAN cable.
LAN cable for connection with the client
 Use a shielded cross cable to directly connect the disk array unit and the client.
 Use shielded straight cables to connect the disk array unit and the client through a hub,
etc.
3.3.5 Connecting Power Supply Cables
 Avoid overloading on an electrical circuit to prevent fire.
 Do not plug in a power supply cable to an outlet and panel
board with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
 Do not place a heavy item on a power supply cable. Doing so
may damage the shield of the cable, which may cause a fire or
an electric shock.
 Connect the power supply cables of the disk array unit after all other processes are
finished.
 Use the power supply cables that come with the disk array unit.
 The disk array unit and a disk enclosure have a dual-power configuration to prevent
the unit or the enclosure from being stopped when one of the power supplies fails. To
use the disk array system, connect two power supply cables individually to the disk
array unit and the disk enclosure for ensuring two lines to receive power.
 Make sure to connect the cables to both the power supply PS0 and PS1.
Preliminary Checking: Press each of disk drives to make sure that they are not loose.
1. Connecting power supply cables of a disk enclosure
Confirm the AC switches are set to off and then connect the power supply cables of the disk
enclosures. (Only for AC power supply.)
Check the power-supply cable connections of all the installed disk enclosures.
66
User Guide
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
2. Connecting power supply cables of the disk array unit
Confirm the AC switches are set to off and then connect the power supply cables of the disk array
unit. (Only for AC power supply.)
The AC operating mode is enabled by default so when the power supply cables are connected
while power is being fed, the power supply is turned on. When power is not fed, connect the power
supply cables and then start feeding power.
Connection Procedure
For AC Power Supply
1. Open the clamp part of the power supply cable clamp, set the power supply cable in the clamp and
lightly lock the clamp part.
2. Move the clamp part in the direction shown by the arrow below close to the lowest part of the plug
and then fix the clamp part steadily.
Figure 3-17: AC Cable
A loosely-locked clamp part may cause the power supply cable to come off.
Fix the power supply cable clamp steadily at a location close to the lowest part of the
power supply cable.
67
Chapter 3 Installing the Disk Array System
User Guide
68
Chapter 4 Storage Manager
This chapter describes how to install Network Setting Tool, how to install the Storage Manager Agent Utility on
application servers, how Storage Manager is provided, and how to start Storage Client.
In this chapter
“How Storage Manager is provided” on page 70
“Before Starting Storage Manager Client” on page 76
“Setup” on page 83
“Installing Storage Manager Agent Utility on Application Server” on page 106
“Starting Storage Manager Client” on page 107
69
Storage Manager
User Guide
4.1 How Storage Manager is provided
4.1.1 How Storage Manager is Provided and Its Configuration
Storage Manager, a disk array management software program, is provided in two types:
 Storage Manager Express
Storage Manager Express allows for configuring and managing only a single target disk array.
You can quickly start using Storage Manager Express through a Web browser on a client machine
with no management server needed.
 Storage Manager
Storage Manager Suite allows for centralized configuration and management of multiple disk
arrays, including the old D/S series, by a single management server.
Storage Manager Suite also allows for integrated management of the entire system by working
together with middleware products (such as WebSAM, ESMPRO, or SSC).
This document describes initialization and settings of a disk array using Storage Manager Express.

For information on initialization and settings of disk arrays using Storage Manager, see:
 Storage Manager Installation Guide
 Storage Manager User's Manual
 Storage Manager Configuration Setting Tool User’s Manual (GUI) for the OptimaX600
series
The descriptions in the rest of this chapter are based on the recommended configuration example
shown in Figure 4-1: Example of Recommended Configuration.
70
Figure 4-1: Example of Recommended Configuration
71
Storage Manager
User Guide
4.1.2 The Operating Environment of Storage Manager Client
Table 4-1 shows the operating environment of Storage Manager Client. A Web browser and Java
Runtime Environment (JRE) must be installed in the system before you start using Storage Manager
Client.
Table 4-1: Operating Environment of Storage Manager Client
Configuration
Description
Hardware
Machine on which one of the OSes in the next column run
 Blade series
 NovaScale series
 extreme computing series
 PC/AT compatibles
Operating System
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition (from without any Service
Pack to Service Pack 3)
Microsoft Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (without any Service
Pack and Service Pack 2)
Microsoft Windows Vista Business (from without any Service Pack to
Service Pack 2)
Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate (without any Service Pack and Service
Pack 1)
Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate x64 (without any Service Pack and
Service Pack 1)
Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise (without any Service Pack and
Service Pack 1)
Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise x64 (without any Service Pack and
Service Pack 1)
Microsoft Windows 7 Professional (without any Service Pack and
Service Pack 1)
Microsoft Windows 7 Professional x64 (without any Service Pack and
Service Pack 1)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition (from without any
Service Pack to Service Pack 2)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard Edition (without any
Service Pack and Service Pack 2)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 Edition (without any
Service Pack and Service Pack 2)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition (without
any Service Pack and Service Pack 2)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition (from without any
Service Pack to Service Pack 2)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise Edition (without any
Service Pack and Service Pack 2)
72
Table 4-1: Operating Environment of Storage Manager Client (Contd.)
Configuration
Description
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition (without any
Service Pack and Service Pack 2)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition (without
any Service Pack and Service Pack 2)
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard (without any Service Pack
and Service Pack 2) (*)
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard (without any Service
Pack and Service Pack 1) (*)
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise (without any Service Pack
and Service Pack 2) (*)
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise (without any Service
Pack and Service Pack 1)(*)
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.5 to 5.8, 6.2, 6.3 (IA32/EM64T)
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.5 to 5.8 Advanced Platform
(IA32/EM64T)
(*) Products without Hyper-V are also supported.
The Server Core installation option is not supported.
Web browser
Windows
Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 6 to 9 (32 bit version)
*For Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, only Version 7 or later
are supported.
*For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, only Version 8 or later
are supported.
*Even if using the 64 bit version of Windows, use the 32 bit version of
Internet Explorer.
Linux
Firefox 3.0 to 3.6, 12, 14
Java Runtime Environment
(JRE)
One of the following JREs (32 bit version) is necessary.
 JRE 7 update 5
 JRE 6 update 17 to 33
See Table 4-2 for information on combinations of supported JREs
and OSes.
* When using JRE 7, be sure to use Internet Explorer 7 or later or
Firefox 14.
* When using Internet Explorer 9, be sure to use JRE 7 update 5, or
JRE 6 update 25 or later.
* When using Firefox 12, be sure to use JRE 6 update 32 or later.
* When using FIrefox 14, be sure to use JRE 7 update 5, or JRE 6
update 32 or later.
73
Storage Manager
User Guide
Table 4-1: Operating Environment of Storage Manager Client (Contd.)
Configuration
Description
Memory
Windows
67 MB or more
Linux
70 MB or more
Disk capacity
No program needs to be installed. Note that a maximum of 30 MB is
used for reporting log files.
Display
XGA (resolution 1024 × 768) or greater
The information above is the supported operating environment for the default settings of Storage
Manager.
The latest information is available through PP Support Service, which is provided through registration
before start of the service.
Table 4-2: Operating Environment of Storage Manager Client (JRE and OS Combinations
Operating System
JRE 6 (32-bit version)
* JRE 6 update 17 to 33
JRE 7 (32-bit version)
* JRE 7 update 5
Windows XP Professional Edition
Supported
Supported
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
Supported
Supported
Windows Vista Business
Supported
Supported
Windows 7 Ultimate
Supported
Supported
Windows 7 Enterprise
Supported
Supported
Windows 7 Professional
Supported
Supported
Windows 7 Ultimate x64
Supported
Supported
Windows 7 Enterprise x64
Supported
Supported
Windows 7 Professional x64
Supported
Supported
Windows Server 2003, Standard 2Edition
Supported
Not supported
Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard Edition
Supported
Not supported
Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 Edition
Supported
Not supported
Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard x64
Edition
Supported
Not supported
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition
Supported
Not supported
Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise
Edition
Supported
Not supported
Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64
Edition
Supported
Not supported
Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise x64
Edition
Supported
Not supported
Windows Server 2008 Standard
Supported
Supported
Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard
Supported
Supported
74
Operating System
JRE 6 (32-bit version)
* JRE 6 update 17 to 33
JRE 7 (32-bit version)
* JRE 7 update 5
Windows Server 2008 Enterprise
Supported
Supported
Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
Supported
Supported
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.5 to 5.8, 6.2, 6.3
Supported
Supported
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.5 to 5.8
Advanced Platform
Supported
Supported
Do not use any unsupported OS and JRE combinations.
 When any product that uses Java Runtime Environment (JRE) is already
installed in the environment where Storage Manager Client (WebGUI) is
used, the product and Storage Manager Client can live together if the
following condition is satisfied. If not, either Storage Manager Client
(WebGUI) or the product must be operated on another server or PC.
 The latest version of JRE installed in the environment supports Storage
Manager Client (WebGUI) as well as the product.
 Use the JRE contained in the Storage Manager DVD-ROM for first
installation. However, it is recommended to use the latest version among
the supported JRE versions after the installation because the supported
versions may include a version for which security vulnerability issue is
reported.
For information about the latest supported JRE version, see PP Support
Service (which is available by registration).
For details about security vulnerability, see the following web pages.


US-CERT (http://www.us-cert.gov)
My Oracle Support (https://support.oracle.com/CSP/ui/flash.html)
75
Storage Manager
User Guide
4.2 Before Starting Storage Manager Client
When you use Storage Manager Client (Web GUI) in a Windows environment, configure the Web
browser (Internet Explorer) as described below. Once the configuration is complete, you do no need to
configure the Web browser in subsequent startups of Storage Manager Client.
1. Follow the steps below to configure the disk array to be connected as “Trusted Sites.”
(The following screenshot is for Internet Explorer 8 on Windows 7)
a. From Control Panel, select Internet Options, and click the Security tab.
b. Select the Trusted sites icon and click Sites.
Figure 4-2: Internet Options Window
c. Enter the URL of the disk array to be connected (for example, http: the IP address (host name)
of the disk array to be connected) in the Add this website to the zone box, and click Add.
The Require server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone check box should be
cleared.
76
Figure 4-3: Trusted Sites Window
d. Click OK to close the window.
2. Follow the steps below to configure the security level of Trusted sites.
a. From Control Panel, select Internet Options, and click the Security tab.
b. Select the Trusted sites icon and click Custom level.
77
Storage Manager
User Guide
Figure 4-4: Internet Options Window
3. Select Enable under Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins.
78
Figure 4-5: Security Settings Window
4. Click OK to close the window.
When you are using Internet Explorer Version 7 or later, do not enable Protected Mode of
the Trusted sites.
When your environment is Windows, configure Java as well before you start using Storage Manager
Client (Web GUI). Once the configuration is complete, you do not need to configure Java again in
subsequent startups of Storage Manager Client.
Disable the auto update function of Java according to the following procedure:
(The example is based on Windows 7.)
79
Storage Manager
User Guide
1. Open the Java Control Panel.
Use Explorer and execute the following file located in the JRE installation folder. (In a Windows
Vista or later environment or a Windows Server 2008 or later environment, right-click the icon to
start the Web browser to select Run as administrator.)
C:\Program Files\Java\jre6\bin\javacpl.exe (default installation in the
32 bit version OS)
C:\Program Files (x86)\Java\jre6\bin\javacpl.exe (default installation in
the 64 bit version)
Alternatively, when you are using a 32-bit version of OS and if Java is in Control Panel,
you can use it.
2. Click the Update tab and clear the Check for Updates Automatically check box.
Figure 4-6: Update Tab of Java Control Panel
3. Click OK to close the window.
80
Disable the next generation Java plug-in according to the following procedure.
(The example is based on Windows 7.)
1. Open Java Control Panel.
Use Explorer and execute the following file located in the JRE installation folder. (In a Windows
Vista or later environment or a Windows Server 2008 or later environment, right-click the icon to
start the Web browser to select Run as administrator.)
C:\Program Files\Java\jre6\bin\javacpl.exe (default installation in the
32 bit version OS)
C:\Program Files (x86)\Java\jre6\bin\javacpl.exe (default installation in
the 64 bit version)
Alternatively, when you are using a 32-bit version of OS and if Java is in Control Panel,
you can use it.
2. Click the Advanced tab and clear the Enable the next-generation Java Plug-in (requires
browser restart) check box.
81
Storage Manager
User Guide
Figure 4-7: Advanced Tab of Control Panel
3. Click OK to close the window.
82
4.3 Setup
4.3.1 Installing Network Setting Tool
This section describes how to install Network Setting Tool on the Storage Manager Client machine.
Install Network Setting Tool according to the platform of your Storage Manage Client.
4.3.1.1 For Windows
Use Storage Manager Setup to install Network Setting Tool.
Please prepare the DVD-ROM for Optima3600 series. Follow the instruction on the screen to complete
the installation.
In the environment in which only .NET Framework version 4 or later is installed, you need to install
.NET Framework version 2.0 SP2 by starting the following program in the DVD-ROM.
\DOTNETFW\WINDOWS\<processor>\NetFx20SP2_XXX.exe


Select the <processor> folder according to the OS edition (x86, x64, or ia64).
XXX in the NetFx20SP2_XXX.exe is the name of the <processor> folder (x86, x64, or ia64).
Follow the steps below to use Storage Manager Setup.
1. Log in as Administrator.
2. Set the DVD-ROM in the DVD-ROM drive of the client.
3. Storage Manager Setup automatically starts. Follow the instructions on the screen to perform the
installation.
Storage Manager Setup may not automatically start in some environments, in which case you need
to start the following program in the DVD-ROM.
\INSTALL\WINDOWS\ISMSETUP.EXE
83
Storage Manager
User Guide
4. Select Setup for OptimaX600 series and click Next.
Figure 4-8: Start Page of Setup
84
5. Select Setup as a disk array in Quick Install, and then click Next.
Figure 4-9: Select Installation Method
85
Storage Manager
User Guide
6. Check the software to be installed and then click Next.
Figure 4-10: Confirm Software
86
7. Make sure to read all of the software license agreement. If you accept the agreement select I
accept terms of the license agreement and then click Next. If you do not accept the agreement,
you cannot use the software.
Figure 4-11: License Agreement
87
Storage Manager
User Guide
8. Select where the software will be installed. If you want to install the software in the shown
destination, click Next. If you want to install the software in a folder other than the shown
destination, click Browse to select the folder you want to use.
Figure 4-12: Choose Destination Location
9. Install the software as you are prompted by the instructions.
If you install JRE in this step, perform the JRE preparation described in Section 4.2:
“Before Starting Storage Manager Client”
88
10.Click Next to start Network Setting Tool.
Figure 4-13: Starting Network Setting Tool
11.Proceed to configuration of IP addresses of the disk array. See Section 4.3.2: “Configuring IP
Addresses by Using Network Setting Tool”.
Configure the IP addresses of the disk array during the installation. The IP addresses consist of the IP
addresses of controllers, BMC addresses of controllers and a floating address. If Storage Manager
Client is used, an IP address should be set to each of controllers.
A BMC address is a communication port to be used to link Storage Manager with
EMSPRO/AutomaticRunningController (ESMPRO/AC).
When the installation is started from by selecting Setup for OptimaX600 series in Storage
Manager Setup, JRE and .NET Framework, which are necessary for Network Setting Tool
and Storage Manager Client (Web GUI), must be installed.
89
Storage Manager
User Guide
“Storage Manager Setup” installs JRE 6 update 33. The Storage Manager DVD-ROM also
includes the JRE 7 update 5 installer. If you want to use JRE 7, install it following either of
the procedures below. The version of JRE that you have used is changed by installing JRE
7. Note that this may affect other applications that use JRE.
 Before starting Storage Manager Setup, install JRE 7 update5 by running the
installer.
* In this case, Storage Manager Setup will not install JRE.
 After executing Storage Manager Setup, uninstall JRE 6 update 33 (or JRE 6 that
has been installed), and then install JRE 7 update 5 by running the installer.
* Uninstall JRE 6 from Programs and Features (Add or Remove Programs for
Windows XP) of Control Panel. It is unnecessary to change the Storage Manager
settings even if the version of JRE is changed.
The JRE 7 update 5 installer is stored in the following folder in the Storage Manager
DVD-ROM. To run the installer directly, open the folder by using Explorer, and
double-click the installer file.
\JRE7\WINDOWS\jre-7u5-windows-i586.exe
After installing JRE 7 update 5, perform the JRE preparation described in Section 4.2:
“Before Starting Storage Manager Client”.
90
4.3.1.2 For Linux
Follow the steps below to install Network Setting Tool.
Please prepare the DVD-ROM of the Optima3600 series.
1. Log in as root user.
2. Set the DVD-ROM in the DVD-ROM drive of the client.
If you cannot use the DVD-ROM in your environment, send the iSMnetconfig.rpm file from another
server.
3. Mount the DVD-ROM
 Create a mount directory (Example: /cdrom)
mkdir /cdrom
 Use the mount command.
mount -r /dev/cdrom /cdrom
4. Install JRE.
If it is already installed on your machine, the installation is not necessary.
 Copy the installer to a directory you want to use (for example, /tmp).
cp -r /cdrom/JRE/LINUX/jre-6u33-linux-i586-rpm.bin /tmp/.
 Run the installer you have copied.
/tmp/jre-6u33-linux-i586-rpm.bin
For the above sample procedure, JRE 6 update 33 is installed. The Storage Manager
DVD-ROM also includes the JRE 7 update 5 installer. If you wish to use JRE 7, specify
the installer as follows:
/cdrom/JRE7/LINUX/jre-7u5-linux-i586.rpm
5. Use the rpm command for the installation.
rpm -ivh /cdrom/NETCONFIG/LINUX/iSMnetconfig.rpm
6. The following message is shown when the installation is complete.
Installation of iSMnetconfig was successful.
7. Unmount the DVD-ROM. Use the unmount command.
umount /cdrom
8. Register JRE with the Web browser (Firefox) according to the following procedure.
a. Exit Firefox.
b. If any JREs have been registered with the plugins directory of Firefox, delete them. (You cannot
register JRE of different versions at a time.)
Remove the symbolic links "libjavaplugin-oji.so" and "libnpjp2.so" from
/usr/lib/firefox-<version>/plugins (for the default settings).
91
Storage Manager
User Guide
c. Create a symbolic link to JRE in the plugins directory of Firefox.
Run the following command with the /usr/lib/firefox-<version>/plugins (for the
default settings) as a current directory.
ln -s /usr/java/jre<version>/plugin/i386/ns7/libjavaplugin_oji.so (for
Firefox 3.5 or earlier)
ln -s /usr/java/jre<version>/lib/i386/libnpjp2.so (for Firefox 3.6 or later)
 The disk array must be connected to the Storage Manager Client machine
over a LAN to execute Network Setting Tool.
 Note the following when you connect a disk array for which the network
settings have not been configured.
 The IP addresses, BMC addresses and a floating address of the disk
array are 0.0.0.0 by default.
 Connect the disk array to physically the same network where the
Storage Manager Client machine belongs (i.e. the network not beyond
a router).
 User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and port number "2730" are used for
searching disk arrays. If a firewall is set, configure the settings of the
network for the Storage Manager Client machine and the disk array to
allow packets for search to pass.
92
4.3.2 Configuring IP Addresses by Using Network Setting Tool
4.3.2.1 Overview
Network addresses are set to a disk array for monitoring from Storage Manager.
After connecting the disk array (device) to physically the same network where the machine on which
Network Setting Tool has been installed (i.e. the network not beyond a router), configure IP addresses
having the same segment as the machine on which Network Setting Tool has been installed by
referring to the example shown below.
For example:
The address of the machine on which Network Setting Tool is installed is 192.168.0.20/24.
Figure 4-14: Connect Disk Array - Example
* 1. IP addresses have the same segment as the machine on which Network Setting Tool
has been installed.
* 2. When the disk array and the Storage Manager Client are operated on different
segments, configure IP addresses by referring to the example shown above and then
move the disk array. When you move the disk array, make sure to remember the
gateway address settings.
93
Storage Manager
User Guide
4.3.2.2 Configuration
In a Windows environment, Network Setting Tool is automatically started after Network Setting Tool is
installed by using Storage Manager Setup.
To configure manually, click Start > All Programs > Storage Manager Network Initialization Tool >
Network Setting Tool to run Network Setting Tool.
In a Linux environment,
1. Run the iSMinitool command.
Figure 4-15: Select a Disk Array - Start up
2. Click Refresh when Network Setting Tool is started.
94
Figure 4-16: Select a Disk Array
Disk arrays detected through search are displayed.
“not set” is shown for Status for disk arrays for which network settings will be performed for the first
time.
3. Select the target disk array from the list and click Set.
If the Optima X600 series has been installed and IP addresses have been configured, "finished" is
shown in the Status column. For details about information shown for the Status column, see
Table 4-3.
Status
Table 4-3: Initialization Status of Disk Array
Description
Displayed information
Disk array status
not set
Disk array has just been installed
The disk array is not monitored by Storage Manager because the
network settings have not been done.
IP addresses must be configured by using Network Setting Tool
finished
IP addresses have been configured
The disk array can be monitored by Storage Manager.
95
Storage Manager
User Guide
4. Configure the network addresses to allow monitoring the disk array by Storage Manager.
Figure 4-17: Network Settings
5. Configure a floating address for the disk array and the network address, BMC address, and floating
address for each of disk array controllers. When the settings are configured for a controller not
connected by a LAN cable, monitoring is disabled.
96
6. Check that the disk array is connected to the client over the LAN and then specify an IP address, a
subnet mask, a gateway address, a BMC address, a BMC subnet mask and a BMC gateway
address for each of the controllers.
The following IP addresses are reserved, so these IP addresses and subnet mask cannot be
specified.
10.1.0.1 - 10.1.0.254 (subnet mask 255.255.255.0)
10.2.0.1- 10.2.0.254 (subnet mask 255.255.255.0)
and 0.0.0.0 are reserved. These IP addresses and subnet mask can not be specified. Specify IP
addresses for the controller other than these IP addresses and that allow communication with the
client.
Also, the IP address and subnet mask in the network segment including a reserved IP address
cannot be specified. For example, the following addresses cannot be specified.
10.1.0.1 - 10.1.255.254 (subnet mask 255.255.0.0)
10.2.0.1- 10.2.255.254 (subnet mask 255.255.0.0)
10.0.0.1- 10.255.255.254 (subnet mask 255.0.0.0)
If no gateway address is specified, enter 0.0.0.0.
Floating address is an IP address that can be set to a disk array in addition to the network
addresses configured for each controller. Setting a floating address allows you to access a disk
array while controllers remain transparent.
If the disk array has multiple controllers, it is recommended to configure a floating address for ease
of management.
If the disk array has a single controller, it is not necessary to configure a floating address. (If you
specify the floating address, the setting of IP Addresses will fail.)
When a floating address is specified, the following conditions must be satisfied for network
addresses of controllers and the floating address.
 IP addresses of Controller 0 and Controller 1 belong to the same segment and an unused IP
address of the same segment as the controllers is assigned to the floating address.
 IP addresses of Controller 0 and Controller 1 belong to different segments and an IP address
that does not belong to those segments and does not have any conflict with other existing
segments is assigned to the floating address.
7. When all the required information is entered, click Set. The dialog box for confirmation is displayed.
97
Storage Manager
User Guide
Figure 4-18: Network Setting Tool - Confirmation Dialog Box
8. Click Set to set the specified values to the disk array.
9. Click Cancel to change the settings.
 If any IP address, subnet mask, or gateway address is not configured
correctly, configuring the network settings fails. As a result, monitoring
by using Storage Manager is not enabled.
 If the error message “The setting of IP address failed.” is shown, refer
to the help of Network Setting Tool.
98
4.3.3 Setting a Time Zone of the Disk Array
This section describes how to set a time zone of the disk array.
4.3.3.1 For Windows
Use Storage Manager Setup to configure the time zone settings.
Storage Manager Setup is automatically started when you set the Storage Manager Express Setup
and Utility DVD-ROM, and it allows you to perform the settings as prompted. Depending on your
environment, it may not start automatically, in which case, run the following program in the DVD-ROM.
\INSTALL\WINDOWS\ISMSETUP.EXE
Follow the steps below by using Storage Manager Setup.
1. After you configure IP addresses as described in Section 4.3.2: “Configuring IP Addresses by Using
Network Setting Tool”, the page to set a time zone appears.
Figure 4-19: Select Disk Array Type
99
Storage Manager
User Guide
2. Select Setup for Optima X600 series and click Next. The Select Installation Method page
appears.
Figure 4-20: Select Installation Method
100
Figure 4-21: Setting in a Time Zone
3. To set a time zone, select Yes and click Next. By default, Asia and (GMT +9) Tokyo time zone is set.
If you want to skip the setting, select No.
101
Storage Manager
User Guide
4. When you select Yes, the following page appears.
Figure 4-22: Setting in a Time Zone - Select Time Zone
5. Select the Time Zone and click Set Time Zone. Click Next.
102
6. Click Finish on the setup completion page. The Web browser is started. See Section 4.5.2:
“Starting Storage Manager Client”.
Figure 4-23: Setup Completion
103
Storage Manager
User Guide
4.3.3.2 For Linux
Follow the steps below and use the time zone setting command to set a time zone of the disk array.
1. Log in as root user.
2. Set the DVD-ROM in the DVD-ROM drive of the client.
3. Mount the DVD-ROM.
 Create a mount directory (Example: /cdrom).
 Use the mount command for mounting
mount -r /dev/cdrom /cdrom
4. Run the time zone setting command (iSMtzconfig) to obtain the time zone. Run the following
program in the CD-Rom for the time setting command.
TZCONFIG/LINUX/iSMtzconfig
# /tmp/TZCONFIG/LINUX/iSMtzconfig show
Serial Number
0000000991050240
Time Zone information
Asia/Tokyo
(GMT+9)
iSMtzconfig: 001 Command has completed successfully.
5. Check the result of running the command.
Confirm that the message number 001 is reported and the time zone of the disk array is shown after
running the time setting command.
6. To change the time zone, run the time setting command.
# /tmp/TZCONFIG/LINUX/iSMtzconfig set -serial 0000000991050240 -zone
Asia/Tokyo -reboot
Serial Number
0000000991050240
Time Zone information
Asia/Tokyo
(GMT+9)
iSMtzconfig: 001 Command has completed successfully.
104
7. Check the result of running the command.
Confirm that the message number 001 is reported and the time zone of the disk array is shown after
running the time setting command.
When you complete setting a time zone, the disk array is restarted. Before
you start setting a time zone, check that it does adversely affect your
operations.
When using Red Hat Enterprise Linux Version 6 in an EM64T server
environment, the following packages must be installed in advance.
glibc-XXXX.i686.rpm
nss-softokn-freebl-XXXX.i686.rpm
These packages are included in the OS installation media.
* XXXX indicates the version of the package.
105
Storage Manager
User Guide
4.4 Installing Storage Manager Agent Utility on Application Server
This section describes how to install the Storage Manager Agent Utility on an application server.
For details about the installation procedure, see either of the following depending on the platform of the
application server.
 For Windows application servers, see Section B.1: “Installing Storage Manager Agent Utility”.
 For Linux application servers, see Section D.1.1: “Overview”.
106
4.5 Starting Storage Manager Client
This section describes how to start up Storage Manager Client.
4.5.1 Before Starting Storage Manager Client
Before you use Storage Manager Client (Web GUI) in a Windows environment, configure the Web
browser (Internet Explorer) and Java. For details see Section 4.2: “Before Starting Storage Manager
Client”.
4.5.2 Starting Storage Manager Client
Start the Web browser. (In a Windows Vista or later or Windows Server 2008 or later environment,
right-click the icon to start the Web browser to select Run as administrator.)
Start up the Storage Manager Client by entering the host name or the IP address (floating address, or
if no floating address is assigned, the IP address of Controller 0 or Controller 1) of the disk array to be
connected in the address bar of the Web browser.
For example:
http://host name (or http://IP address)
If you enter the IP address in the IPv6 format, the IP address must be enclosed in square
brackets [ ], in which case, you cannot use Internet Explorer 6.
107
Storage Manager
User Guide
Figure 4-24: Log On Screen
Parameter
Description
User Name
Allows to enter user name.
Save User Name
Allows to save the entered user name.
Password
Allows to enter a password.
Save Password
Allows to save the entered password.
Perform the following steps to logon to Storage Manager client:
1. Enter “sysadmin” in the User Name box.
2. Enter “sys123” (default value) in the Password box.
Saving the user name and/or the password can lead to allowing access to
anyone.
108
When you click Options, the login window is expanded as shown in Figure 4-25: Log On Screen
(Expanded), which allows you to configure the behavior after login.

For details, see Storage Manager User's Manual.
Figure 4-25: Log On Screen (Expanded)
Parameter
Description
Save Messages to a Log File
Allows to saves messages to a log file
Display Maintenance Status
If this option is selected, an error/warning in underlying
component will be escalated to higher layer even if there is no
affect to the operation.
Logical Disk View Order
Select Number to view the logical disks sorted in logical disk
number order.
Select Name (OS + Logical Disk Name) to view the logical
disks sorted in OS Type and logical disk name order.
109
Storage Manager
User Guide
d. Click Login to open the main screen.
Figure 4-26: Main Screen
110
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
This chapter describes how to initialize a disk array configured for FC connection.
In this chapter
“Overview” on page 112
“Collecting Host Information From Application Servers” on page 113
“Initialization by Storage Manager” on page 115
“Checking Connection from Application Servers” on page 152
111
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
5.1 Overview
To set FC connection first in a disk array configured for both FC and iSCSI connections, do the
procedure in this chapter and then see Chapter 6, "Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)" to make the
settings.
To set iSCSI connection first, see Chapter 6, "Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)" to make settings and
then do the procedure in this chapter.
To initialize a disk array configured for iSCSI connection, see Chapter 6, "Initializing a Disk
Array (iSCSI)" .
The initialization consists of:
1. Collecting host information
Collect host information from the application server.
For details about the procedure, see Section 5.2: “Collecting Host Information From Application
Servers”.
2. Initializing the disk array by using the initialization wizard
Use the initialization wizard to make the basic settings of the disk array.
For details about the procedure, see Section 5.3.1: “Initialization Wizard”.
3. Binding a pool
Bind a pool in the disk array.
For details about the procedure, see Section 5.3.2: “Binding a Pool”.
4. Binding a hot spare
Bind a hot spare. This step is not required unless a hot spare is bound.
For details about the procedure, see Section 5.3.3: “Binding a Hot Spare”.
5. Binding logical disks
Bind logical disks.
For details about the procedure, see Section 5.3.4: “Binding Logical Disks”.
6. Collection and registration of host information
Collect host information and register it with the disk array.
For details about the procedure, see Section 5.3.5: “Collecting Host Information”
7. Assigning the logical disks to the application servers
Assign the created logical disk to the application servers.
For details about the procedure, see Section 5.3.6: “Assigning Logical Disks”.
8. Checking connection from the application servers
Check that the application server to which the logical disks have been assigned can access the disk
array.
For details about the procedure, see Section 5.4: “Checking Connection from Application Servers”.
112
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
5.2 Collecting Host Information From Application Servers
This section describes collection of host information from application servers.
Host information can be automatically collected if the OS used on the application servers is only
Windows and servers used in the system are all new (servers that have not begun operating).
When there is any Linux (RHEL5 or later or SLES10 or later) application server and the servers used in
the system are all new (servers that have not begun operating), host information can be collected
through the disk array.
To collect host information when the disk array is installed in a system that has already begun
operating or there is any application server on a different operating system, see Section B.2.1:
“Collecting Host Information by Using File Output” for a Windows environment, or Section E.2.1:
“Collecting Host Information by Using File Output” for a Linux environment.
1. Configurations where host information can be collected automatically or through a disk
array
When the OS of new servers to be connected by FC cables is Windows and a disk array is newly
installed, host information can be automatically collected by using the Storage Manager Host Agent
Service function and FC connection paths between the disk array and Windows servers. When the
OS of new servers to be connected by FC cables is Linux (RHEL5 or later or SLES10 or later) and
a disk array is newly installed, host information can be collected through the disk array.
For details about the setting, see Section 5.3.5: “Collecting Host Information”.
To collect host information without connecting FC cables in one of the configurations above, see
Section B.2.1: “Collecting Host Information by Using File Output” for a Windows environment, or
Section E.2.1: “Collecting Host Information by Using File Output” for a Linux environment.
Figure 5-1: Configuration - Auto-Collection of Host Information
113
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
2. Collecting host information by using files reported by the host information collection
command
When a disk array is installed in a system that has already begun operating or any of the application
servers to be connected by FC cables is on an OS other than Windows or Linux (RHEL5 or later or
SLES10 or later), use the host information collection command to report files. Registering the
reported files allows assigning the application server to created logical disks. For details about how
to register reported files, see Section B.2.2: “Registering Host Information by Using File Output” for
a Windows environment, or Section E.2.2: “Registering Host Information by Using File Output” for a
Linux environment.
Figure 5-2: Configuration - Collect Host Information Using Host Information Collection
Command
5.2.1 Collecting Host Information From Application Server
To make settings for collecting host information automatically or through a disk array, see Section
5.3.5: “Collecting Host Information”.
For details about how to collect host information, see one of the following depending on the platform of
the application server:
 For a Windows application server, see Section B.2: “Collecting/Registering Host Information on
Application Server”.
 For a Linux application server, see Section E.2: “Collecting/Registering Host Information on
Application Server”.
114
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
5.3 Initialization by Storage Manager
5.3.1 Initialization Wizard
5.3.1.1 Overview
Use the initialization wizard to make the basic settings of a disk array.
Operations to be performed on the initialization wizard are:
 Set the disk array subsystem name
Change and/or confirm a disk array name.
 Set time
Set time by configuring the NTP server, or manually.
 Unlock licenses
Unlock licenses.
 Host connection port parameters (FC)
Set the host connection port.
 Port mode switching
Change the port mode.
115
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
5.3.1.2 Starting the initialization wizard
Click Configuration and Initialization on the left pane to open the menu. Then click Start to start the
initialization wizard.
Figure 5-3: Starting Initialization Wizard
Before the initialization starts, the following confirmation message appears.
Click Yes to start the initialization wizard.
116
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
5.3.1.3 Welcome to Initialization Wizard
When the initialization wizard starts, perform the settings as prompted.
Figure 5-4: Welcome to Initialization Wizard
Click Next.
117
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
5.3.1.4 Set Disk Array Subsystem Name
You can change the disk array name.
Figure 5-5: Setting Disk Array Subsystem Name
Parameter
Description
Product ID
Displays the product ID of the disk array.
Serial Number
Displays the serial number of the disk array.
Disk Array Subsystem Name
Displays a name to identify the disk array subsystem.
New Disk Array Subsystem
Name
By default, displays the current disk array subsystem name.
To change this name, enter a new disk array subsystem name.
Perform the following steps to change a disk array name:
118
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
1. Enter a new name in the New Disk Array Subsystem Name box.
2. Confirm the name and click Next.
5.3.1.5 Set Time
Figure 5-6: Set Time
Parameter
Description
State
Displays the date and time currently set for the disk array
and the status of synchronization with the NTP server
appear.
Synchronize the time with the NTP
server.
Select this option to move on to the NTP setting page.
119
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Set the time manually.
Select this option to move on to the manual time setting
page.
Don’t set the time now.
Select this option to move on to the step to unlock license
without setting time.
To configure a time using NTP, select Synchronize the time with the NTP server and click Next.

For the procedure when the Set the time manually option is selected, see Configuration
Setting Tool User's Manual (GUI) for OptimaX600 Series.
120
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
5.3.1.6 Set Time - NTP server
Configure the NTP settings.
Figure 5-7: Set Time - Setting NTP Server
Parameter
Description
IP Address
Specify an IP address of the NTP server.
To set NTP server, enter the required information and click Next.
121
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
5.3.1.7 Unlock License
Unlocks the licenses of the disk array.
Figure 5-8: Unlocking License
Parameter
Description
Hide unlocked license
keys
Click this button to hide unlocked license keys.
Application completion
Displays the licenses which are currently unlocked.
Application history
Displays history of unlocked licenses, deleted licenses, and expired
licenses.
License key
Enter a license key and click Add to register the key with the License key
list.
Add
Click this button to register the entered License key with the License key
list.
122
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
Parameter
Description
Licence key list
Displays a list of entered license keys.
Delete
Click this button to remove the selected license keys from the license key
list.
To unlock the licenses, enter all the license keys to be unlocked and click Next.
5.3.1.8 Host Connection Port Parameters (FC)
Set the host connection port for the disk array supporting FC.
.
123
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
Figure 5-9: Host Port Connection Parameters (FC)
Parameter
Description
Port list
Select the port you want to set.
Edit button
A dialog box is displayed that lets you edit the settings of the selected port.
Edit dialog
Figure 5-10: Edit Dialog
Parameter
Description
Port number
Unique port number
Port name
Specify the name to be assigned to the port.
Platform
Specify the platform of the host to be connected.
Data rate
Specify the value corresponding to the data transfer rate of the HBA or
HUB.
Server connection type
Specify the connection topology between the disk array and the host.
Automatic negotiation:
The connection type is automatically negotiated.
FC-AL:
Select this when connecting the host connection port and the application
server directly over an FC cable or when using a loop topology FC switch.
FC switch connection (Fabric):
Select this when using an FC switch other than a loop topology FC switch.
124
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
Parameter
Description
Switch ID
Specify the value of the switch for the port. The specifiable value range is
00h to 7dh.
When connecting multiple disk arrays in a loop topology FC switch
configuration, make sure that the value of each switch is unique.
Port type
Select the port type.
Host port:
Select this when connecting to the host.
Data migration port:
Select this when using the data migration function.
Replication port:
Select this when using the remote data replication function.
This setting is displayed only when the data migration function and/or
remote data replication function is usable.
Clicking OK applies the change of settings to the list.
When you click Next after changing the port settings as needed, the port settings are made.
When Replication port is selected for Port type. Platform cannot be
specified.
125
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
5.3.1.9 Port Mode Switching
You can change the FC port mode of the disk array.
Figure 5-11: Port Mode Switching Screen
(a) Port List view
The Port List view lets you check the information about the disk array ports.
A port number is expressed in the format of "director number-port number".
The following items are displayed.
Port Number
Port Name
126
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
Mode
WWN: Port in the WWN mode
Port: Port in the Port mode.
Configuration lock
Lock: Locked port
(Empty): Port not locked
Unselectable Reason
The following items are hidden by default.
Host
To display any of these items, right-click the item name and set Display to the relevant item.
(b) WWN Mode and Port Mode radio buttons
WWN Mode:Changes the mode of the port to the WWN mode.
Port Mode:Changes the mode of the port to the port mode.
(c) Change All button
If you click this button, all the ports are changed to the mode selected with WWN Mode or Port Mode.
In this case, you do not need to select a port from the port list. However, you cannot change the mode
by using this button if there are any ports locked by the port configuration lock/unlock function. You
cannot change to the port mode if the configuration lock function confirms that any target application
server is in operation. Stop all the target application servers before performing this operation.
(d) Change Selected button
If you select a port and then click this button, the selected port is changed to the mode selected with
WWN Mode or Port Mode. You can select multiple ports in the port list if they are in the same mode.
When a confirmation screen is displayed for checking the settings in advance, check the current mode
of the port and the mode you are changing to. However, you cannot change the mode of a port locked
by the port configuration lock/unlock function. You cannot change to the port mode if the configuration
lock function confirms that any target application server is in operation. Stop all the target application
servers before performing this operation.
127
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
5.3.1.10 Finish Initialization Wizard
Confirm that the initialization is finished.
Figure 5-12: Finish Initialization Wizard
Parameter
Description
Bind pool
When you click this hyperlink, the Pool Bind page appears for
starting pool binding.
To move on to pool binding, click Bind pool.
When the initialization is complete, the Access Control function starts
automatically
128
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
5.3.2 Binding a Pool
Perform basic settings for binding a pool.
5.3.2.1 Pool Bind
Figure 5-13: Pool Bind
Parameter
Description
Show pool list
Click Show pool list to see the list of existing pools.
Click Close pool list to hide the pool list.
Physical disk type
Select the type of physical disks that configure a pool.
RAID type
Select the RAID type of the pool.
129
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Auto disk selection
Specify the number of physical disks to be used from the
Number of physical disks and the capacity per physical disk
from Physical disk capacity.
The selectable numbers of physical disks are:
 RAID6(4+PQ): 6 disks or more
 RAID6(8+PQ): 10 disks or more
 RAID5(2+P): 3 disks or more
 RAID5(4+P): 5 disks or more
 RAID5(8+P): 9 disks or more
 RAID-TM: 3 disks or more
 RAID1: 2 disks or more
Manual disk selection
Select this option and click Select physical disks to manually
select physical disks to be used for a pool.
Calculate pool capacity
Click this button to see an estimated capacity of a pool in Total
capacity of the pool. When Physical disk type, RAID type,
Number of physical disks, Physical disk capacity is
changed, there is possibility that “calculating” is displayed
temporarily under Total capacity of the pool.
Bind a virtual capacity pool
Leave this check box unchecked to build a real capacity pool.
Perform the following steps to bind a pool:
1. Select the type of physical disk from Physical disk type.
2. Select the type of RAID from the RAID type drop-down list menu.
3. Select the number of physical disk that configure the pool and their capacity using either Auto disk
selection option or Manual disk selection option.
 When 61 or more physical disks configure a pool, pool expansion is
automatically performed.
 The value for Total capacity of the pool displayed for a pool
configuration with 61 or more physical disks is rough estimate.
4. Click Next to move on to the step for checking settings.
130
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
5.3.2.2 Pool Bind- Confirmation
The page for confirming the settings of pool binding appears. This page lists the settings of the pool to
be bound.
Figure 5-14: Pool Bind - Confirmation
Parameter
Description
Basic Settings
Displays basic settings to be used for binding a pool.
Advanced Settings
Displays default advanced settings to be used for binding a
pool.
Advanced
Click Advanced to modify the default settings displayed under
Advanced Settings.
Physical disks to configure the
pool
Displays details of physical disks used to configure a pool.
131
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
Check if the list has any problems. If the list has no problems, click Set to display the confirmation
message.
Click Yes to perform pool binding. When the binding is completed, the completion window appears.
 When a physical disk to be used is stopped with the power saving function
on, it takes time to bind the pool
 When the first pool is bound, a system value (8GB) is automatically
created.
132
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
5.3.2.3 Pool Bind - Completion
When the pool binding is successfully completed, the result of pool binding appears.
Figure 5-15: Pool Bind - Completion
Parameter
Description
Bind another pool
Click this hyperlink to reopen the Pool Bind page to bind
another pool.
Bind hot spare
Click this hyperlink to open the Hot Spare Bind page.
Bind logical disk
Click this hyperlink to open the Logical Disk Bind page.
Perform the following steps:
1. Click Bind hot spare to bind hot spare.
2. If you do not want to bind hot spare, click Bind logical disk to move on to logical disk binding.
133
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
5.3.3 Binding a Hot Spare
This section explains how to bind a hot spare.
5.3.3.1 Hot Spare Bind
The Hot Spare Bind page has the view display and the list display. The displays can be switched by
clicking the tabs.
Figure 5-16: Hot Spare Bind - List Display
134
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
Figure 5-17: Hot Spare Bind - View Display
Parameter
Description
List
By default, the List view is displayed. The List view displays
a list of physical disks available to bind a spare. Select the
specified check box of the physical disk for which hot spare
will be bound.
View
Click this tab for the visual display of physical disks
available to bind a spare. Select the specified check box of
the physical disk for which hot spare will be bound.
135
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Pool list
Select a physical disk to create a hot spare.
When you select the physical disk for hot spare binding,
Enabled is displayed under the Enable Hot Spare field of
the Pool list. Pools that are enabled by a newly bound hot
spare are shown in bold.
Enable the copy back mode
Select this option to enable copy back mode.
When a faulty disk is replaced by a new disk, copy back
mode automatically copies back the data to the new disk.
Perform the following steps to bind a hot spare:
1. Select one or more physical disks for hot spare binding.
When you select the physical disks, pools with Enable Hot Spare are displayed in bold letters.
 For slots having no physical disks, the slot names and check boxes are
grayed out in the view display, and the slots are not listed in the list
display.
 For physical disks for which a pool has been bound, the check boxes
are grayed out in the view display, and the disks are not listed in the list
display.
2. Click Set to display the following confirmation message.
3. Click Yes to perform hot spare binding.
136
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
5.3.3.2 Hot Spare Bind - Completion
When the hot spare binding is completed, the result dialog box appears.
Figure 5-18: Hot Spare Bind - Completion
Parameter
Description
Bind another hot spare
Click this hyperlink to reopen the Hot Spare Bind page to
bind another hot spare.
Bind pool
Click this hyperlink to open the Pool Bind page to bind
another pool.
Bind logical disk
Click this hyperlink to open the Logical Disk Bind page.
To bind a logical disk, click Bind logical disk.
137
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
5.3.4 Binding Logical Disks
This section explains how to bind logical disks.
5.3.4.1 Logical Disk Bind
Figure 5-19: Logical Disk Bind
Parameter
Description
Pool list
Displays details of already bound pools. Select a pool in
which logical disks will be bound.
Show all pools
By clearing this check box, you can view only the pool that
is bound this time.
Show logical disks of the selected
pool
Click this button to confirm a list of logical disks that are
bound in the currently selected pool.
138
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
Parameter
Description
Number of logical disks
Specify the number of logical disks to be bound in the
spinner.
Logical disk capacity
Specify the capacity of logical disks to be bound in the
spinner.
Logical disk capacity
Indicates the space size consumed by logical disks.
Capacity logical disks consume
Indicates total size of the space occupied by logical disks.
Unused capacity of the pool
Indicates free space available in a pool.
Logical disk name
Displays the automatically assigned logical disk name. To
change the logical disk name, enter a new logical disk
name. If two or more logical disks are bound, enter a prefix
for them.
Select a pool in which logical disks will be bound, enter the number and capacity of logical disks, and
click Next.
139
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
5.3.4.2 Logical Disk Bind - Confirmation
The settings of the logical disk to be bound are listed. Confirm the logical disk binding settings.
Figure 5-20: Logical Disk Bind - Confirmation
Parameter
Description
Pool information
Displays pool information.
Basic logical disk settings
Displays the basic settings to be used for binding logical
disks.
Logical Disk Advanced Settings
Displays default advanced settings to be used for binding a
logical disk.
140
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
Parameter
Description
Advanced
Click Advanced to modify the default settings displayed
under Logical disk advanced settings.
Logical disks to be bound
Displays the details of the logical disks to be bound.
Perform the following steps for binding a logical disk.
1. The settings of the logical disk to be bound are listed. Confirm the settings.
2. To perform advanced settings, click Advanced.
3. After confirming the settings, click Set to display the following confirmation message.
4. Click Yes to perform the logical-disk binding.
141
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
5.3.4.3 Logical Disk Bind - Completion
The result of the logical disk binding appears.
Figure 5-21: Logical Disk Bind - Completion
Parameter
Description
Bind another logical disk
Click this hyperlink to reopen the Logical Disk Bind page
for another logical disk binding.
Set the host to which logical disks will
be assigned
Click this hyperlink, to open the Host Information
Collection page.
Assign logical disks to the host
Click this hyperlink to open the Assignment of Logical
Disk page.
Click Set the host to which logical disks will be assigned to retrieve the information of the host to
which logical disks that have been bound are assigned.
142
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
5.3.5 Collecting Host Information
5.3.5.1 Host Information Collection
Select how to collect host information.
Figure 5-22: Host Information Collection - Setting Method
Parameter
Description
Collect host information automatically
(Windows, Linux or Hyper-V).
Select this option to retrieve host information automatically
by showing the volume for information retrieval to all hosts.
143
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Update with host information
file.(Windows, Linux or Hyper-V)
Select this option to configure host information by using the
files for host information retrieved on application servers.
Create host information manually.
(Windows, Linux, VMware or
Hyper-V)
Select this option by manually entering interfaces with
hosts, host names, platforms, WWPNs, and port numbers
to configure host information.
Select Collect host information automatically (Windows or Linux) and click Next. The confirmation
dialog box appears.
Click Yes. The Host Information Collection - Registration screen appears.
144
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
5.3.5.2 Host Information Collection- Registration
Figure 5-23: Host Information Collection - Registration
Parameter
Description
Show collected information
Click this button to retrieve the host information collected
by the disk array unit.
Confirm whether the information on all the hosts is retrieved, and then click Yes.
145
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
 On Windows, it may take a few minutes to retrieve information. Wait for a
few minutes before clicking Show collected information.
 On Linux, run the command to register the host information on hosts
before clicking Show collected information.
 Depending on connected switches or HBA settings of hosts, link up may
fail or take time, which result in failure of host information retrieval. For
more details, see Section 9.1: “Troubleshooting According to Device
Conditions”.
146
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
5.3.5.3 Host Information Collection - Completion
The result of the logical-disk binding appears.
Figure 5-24: Host Information Collection - Completion
Parameter
Description
Assign logical disks to the host
Click this hyperlink to assign the bound logical disks to
hosts whose information has been retrieved.
147
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
5.3.6 Assigning Logical Disks
5.3.6.1 Assignment of Logical Disk
Assign logical disks to hosts.
Figure 5-25: Assignment of Logical Disk
Parameter
Description
Host List
Displays hosts registered with the disk array.
Click a host to which you want to assign logical disks.
Register information of a host
Click this hyperlink if you cannot find the target host listed
in the Host list and want to jump to the Host Information
Collection page.
Show all assignable logical disks
Select this check box to display all logical disks that can be
assigned.
148
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
Parameter
Description
Select drop-down list
Select the logical disk list display type from the drop-down
list.
LD List
Displays the list of logical disks bound in the disk array.
Click a logical disk you want to assign.
 The display items can be sorted, however, the order cannot be changed.
 Multiple logical disks can be selected at the same time.
Perform the following steps:
1. Select hosts from the Host List to which logical disks will be assigned.
2. Select logical disks from the LD List to which hosts will be assigned.
3. Click Next.
The host information is not displayed in Host List when no host information is registered.
Click Register information of a host.
See Section P.1: “Registering host information manually (FC)”.
149
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
5.3.6.2 Assignment of Logical Disk - Confirm
Figure 5-26: Assignment of Logical Disk - Confirm
Parameter
Description
Host List
Displays the hosts to which logical disks will be assigned.
LDs Assignable to Host
Displays logical disks to be assigned to the host.
Change LUN
Click this button to open the LUN Settings page, which
allows configuring LUN (Logical Unit Number) setting.
Check the setting and click Set to perform the logical disk assignation. When the assignation is
completed, the completion page appears.
150
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
5.3.6.3 Assignment of Logical Disk - Finish
Figure 5-27: Assignment of Logical Disk - Finish
Parameter
Description
Assign logical disks to another host
Click this hyperlink to assign another logical disk to the
host.
Register information of a host
Click this hyperlink to open the Host Information
Collection page.
The initialization is now complete. Click Finish.
151
Chapter 5 Initializing a Disk Array (FC)
User Guide
5.4 Checking Connection from Application Servers
Check connection from the application servers by following the procedure described in one of the
following:
 For a Windows environment, see Section B.3: “Checking Connection from Application Server”.
 For a Linux environment, Section E.3: “Checking Connection from Application Server”.
152
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
This chapter describes how to initialize a disk array configured for iSCSI connection.
In this chapter
“Overview” on page 154
“Initialization by Storage Manager” on page 156
153
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
6.1 Overview
To set FC connection first in a disk array configured for both FC and iSCSI connections, see Chapter 5,
"Initializing a Disk Array (FC)" to make the setting and then perform the procedure in this chapter.
To set iSCSI connection first, perform the procedure in this chapter and then see Chapter 5, "Initializing
a Disk Array (FC)" to make setting.
To initialize a disk array configured for FC connection, see Chapter 5, "Initializing a Disk
Array (FC)" .
For setting connection to Windows environments without iSCSI HW initiator or Linux environments, the
initialization consists of:
1. Initializing the disk array by using the initialization wizard
Use the initialization wizard to make the basic settings of disk array.
For details about the procedure, see Section 6.2.1: “Initialization Wizard”.
2. Setting by using iSCSI Setup Tool
Use the iSCSI Setup Tool to make the setting required for the application server.
For details about the procedure, see Section 6.2.2: “iSCSI Setup Tool”.
3. Binding pool
Bind a pool in the disk array.
For details about the procedure, see Section 6.2.3: “Binding a Pool”.
4. Binding hot spare
Bind hot spare. This step is not required unless a hot spare is bound.
For details about the procedure, see Section 6.2.4: “Binding a Hot Spare”.
5. Binding logical disk
Bind logical disks.
For details about the procedure, see Section 6.2.5: “Binding Logical Disk”.
6. Assigning the logical disks to application servers
Assign the logical disk to the application servers.
For details about the procedure, Section 6.2.6: “Assigning Logical Disk”.
7. Checking connection from the application servers
Check that the application servers to which the logical disk has been assigned can access the disk
array.
154
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
For setting connection to Windows environments with iSCSI HW initiator or VMware ESX
environments, the initialization consists of:
1. Initializing application servers
Initialize the application servers following the one of the procedures described below:
For a Windows environment with iSCSI initiator, see Section D.1: “Initializing Application Server”.
For a VMware ESC environment, see Section H.1: “Initializing Application Server”.
2. Initializing the disk array by using the initialization wizard
Use the initialization wizard to make the basic settings of disk array.
For details about the procedure, see Section 6.2.1: “Initialization Wizard”.
3. Binding pool
Bind a pool in the disk array.
For details about the procedure, see Section 6.2.3: “Binding a Pool”.
4. Binding hot spare
Bind hot spare. This step is not required unless a hot spare is bound.
For details about the procedure, see Section 6.2.4: “Binding a Hot Spare”.
5. Binding logical disk
Bind logical disks.
For details about the procedure, see Section 6.2.5: “Binding Logical Disk”.
6. Assigning the logical disks to application servers
Assign the logical disk to the application servers.
For details about the procedure, see Section 6.2.6: “Assigning Logical Disk”.
7. Checking connection from the application servers
Check that the application servers to which the logical disk has been assigned can access the disk
array.
For details about the procedure, see Section 6.3: “Checking Connection from Application Servers”.
155
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
6.2 Initialization by Storage Manager
6.2.1 Initialization Wizard
6.2.1.1 Overview
Use initialization wizard to make the basic settings of a disk array.
Operations to be performed on the initialization wizard are:
 Set the disk array subsystem name
Change and/or confirm a disk array subsystem name.
 Set time
Set time by configuring the NTP server, or manually.
 Unlock licenses
Unlock the license.
 Set host connection ports
Set host connection ports.
 Set iSNS server
Register the iSNS server information for setting the iSNS server.
156
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
6.2.1.2 Start Initialization Wizard
Click Configuration and Initialization on the left pane to open the menu. Then click Start to start the
initialization wizard.
Figure 6-1: Starting Initialization Wizard
Before the initialization starts, the following confirmation message appears.
Click Yes to start the Initialization Wizard.
157
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
6.2.1.3 Welcome to Initialization Wizard
When the Initialization Wizard starts, perform the settings as prompted.
Figure 6-2: Welcome to Initialization Wizard
Click Next.
158
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
6.2.1.4 Set Disk Array Subsystem Name
You can change the disk array name.
Figure 6-3: Set Disk Array Subsystem Name
Parameter
Description
Product ID
Displays the product ID of the disk array.
Serial Number
Displays the serial number of the disk array.
159
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Disk Array Subsystem Name
Displays a name to identify the disk array subsystem.
New Disk Array Subsystem
Name
By default, displays the current disk array subsystem name.
To change this name, enter a new disk array subsystem name.
Perform the following steps to change a disk array name:
1. Enter a new name in the New Disk Array Subsystem Name box.
2. Confirm the name and click Next.
160
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
6.2.1.5 Set Time
Figure 6-4: Set Time
Parameter
Description
State
Displays the date and time currently set for the disk array
and the status of synchronization with the NTP server.
Synchronize the time with the NTP
server.
Select this option to move on to the NTP setting page.
161
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Set the time manually.
Select this option to move on to the manual time setting
page.
Don’t set the time now.
Select this option to move on to host port settings without
setting time.
To configure a time using NTP, select Synchronize the time with the NTP server and click Next.

For the procedure when the Set the time manually option is selected, see Configuration
Setting Tool User's Manual (GUI) for OptimaX600 Series.
162
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
6.2.1.6 Set Time - NTP server
Configure the NTP settings.
Figure 6-5: Set Time - Setting NTP Server
Parameter
Description
IP Address
Specify the IP addresses of the NTP servers.
To set NTP server, enter the required information and click Next.
163
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
6.2.1.7 Unlock License
Unlocks the licenses of the disk array.
Figure 6-6: Unlock License
Parameter
Description
Hide unlocked license keys
Click this button to hide unlocked license keys.
Application completion
Displays the licenses which are currently unlocked.
Application history
Displays history of unlocked licenses, deleted licenses, and
expired licenses.
164
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
Parameter
Description
License key
Enter a license key and click Add to register the key with the
License key list.
Add
Click this button to register the entered License key with the
License key list.
Licence key list
Displays a list of entered license keys.
Delete
Click this button to delete license keys selected in the
License key list.
To unlock the licenses, enter all the license keys to be unlocked and click Next.
165
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
6.2.1.8 Set host connection port parameters (iSCSI)
Set host connection ports for the disk array.
Figure 6-7: Host Connection Port Parameters (iSCSI)
Parameter
Description
Edit
Select a port from the host connection port list and click Edit.
The dialog box for editing the settings of the selected port
appears.
To change the settings for another port, select the port to edit
from the host connection port list and click Edit.
166
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
When editing the settings of host connection ports is completed, click Next on the Host connection port
parameters (iSCSI) page.
Figure 6-8: Host Connection Port Parameters (iSCSI) - Setting
Parameter
Description
Port number
Displays unique number for the port.
Port name
Specify a port name.
Link Speed & Duplex
Displays the value of the link speed duplex. These values
cannot be changed.
MTU
Select a MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) size from the
drop-down list. Change the size according to the network
environment in use. The default value is 1500.
Port type
Select the port type.
Host port:
Select this when connecting to the host.
Host replication port:
Select this when using the remote data replication function.
This setting is displayed only when the remote data
replication function is usable.
IP address
Specify an IP address to be set for the port.
Subnet mask
Specify a subnet mask or subnet prefix to be set for the port.
Gateway address
Specify a gateway address to be set for the port.
Clicking OK applies the change of settings to the list.
167
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
When you click Next after changing the port settings as needed, the port settings are made.
Please perform another setup after waiting about 30 seconds after
processing when a setup or change of an IP address is made. When MTU
is changed, communication with other ports in addition to the iSCSI port
may temporarily be interrupted.
168
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
6.2.1.9 Set iSNS Server
When any iSNS server is used, register the iSNS server information.
Figure 6-9: Set iSNS Server
169
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
Parameter
Description
iSNS server IP address and port
number list
Displays the IP address and port number of the iSNS server.
Add
Click this button to add iSNS server information. This
information appears on the iSNS server IP address and
port number list.
Edit
Select an iSNS server from iSNS server IP address and
port number list and click Edit to modify the iSNS
information.
Delete
Select an iSNS server from iSNS server IP address and
port number list and click Delete to remove the iSNS
server.
Perform any of the following steps:
 To set the iSNS servers to be monitored by the disk arrays supporting iSCSI, click Add to enter the
necessary information. Then click Next to go on to Finish initialization wizard page.
 To not use the iSNS server, click Next to move on to license unlock procedure.
170
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
6.2.1.10 Finish Initialization Wizard
Confirm that the initialization is completed.
Figure 6-10: Finish Initialization Wizard
.
Parameter
Description
Operate iSCSI Easy Config Tool
on the host machine
The initialization is suspended to perform initialization by using
iSCSI Setup Tool.
Bind pool
When you click this hyperlink, the Pool Bind page appears to
start pool binding.
When you want to connect a Windows environment with iSCSI HW initiator or VMware ESX
environment, click Bind pool to bind pools.
171
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
When you want to connect a Windows environment without iSCSI HW initiator or Linux environment,
perform the following operations:
1. Click Operate iSCSI Easy Config Tool on the host machine to continue the initialization by using
the iSCSI Setup Tool.
2. When the following window appears, see Section 6.2.2: iSCSI Setup Tool and perform initialization
by using iSCSI Setup Tool. And then click Bind pool to bind pools.
Figure 6-11: Status - Storage Manager Server
172
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
6.2.2 iSCSI Setup Tool
Use iSCSI Setup tool on application servers to configure the settings required on the application
servers.
For details of the procedure, see either of the following sections according to the platform of the
application servers.
 For Windows application servers, see Section C.2: iSCSI Setup Tool.
 For Linux application servers, see Section F.2: iSCSI Setup Tool.
173
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
6.2.3 Binding a Pool
Perform basic settings for binding a pool.
6.2.3.1 Pool Bind
Figure 6-12: Pool Bind
Parameter
Description
Show pool list
Click Show pool list to see the list of existing pools.
Click Close pool list to hide the pool list.
Physical disk type
Select the type of physical disks to configure a pool.
RAID type
Select the RAID type of the pool.
174
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
Parameter
Description
Auto disk selection
Select the number of physical disks to be used from the
Number of physical disks and the capacity per physical disk
from Physical disk capacity.
The selectable numbers of physical disks are:
 RAID6(4+PQ): 6 disks or more
 RAID6(8+PQ): 10 disks or more
 RAID5(2+P): 3 disks or more
 RAID5(4+P): 5 disks or more
 RAID5(8+P): 9 disks or more
 RAID-TM: 3 disks or more
 RAID1: 2 disks or more
Manual disk selection
Select this option and click Select physical disks to manually
select physical disks to be used for a pool.
Calculate pool capacity
Click this button to see the estimated capacity of the pool in
Total capacity of the pool. When Physical disk type, RAID
type, Number of physical disks, Physical disk capacity is
changed, there is possibility that "calculating" is displayed
temporarily under Total capacity of the pool.
Bind a virtual capacity pool
Leave this check box unchecked to build a real capacity pool.
Perform the following steps to bind a pool:
1. Select the type of physical disk from Physical disk type.
2. Select the type of RAID from the RAID type from the drop-down list menu.
3. Select the number of physical disk that configure the pool and their capacity using either Auto disk
selection option or Manual disk selection option.
 When 61 or more physical disks configure a pool, pool expansion is
automatically performed.
 The value for Total capacity of the pool displayed for a pool
configuration with 61 or more physical disks is a rough estimate.
4. Click Next to move on to the page for confirming settings.
6.2.3.2 Pool Bind - Confirmation
The page for confirming the settings of pool binding appears. This screen lists the settings of the pool
to be bound.
175
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
Figure 6-13: Pool Bind - Confirmation
Parameter
Description
Basic Settings
Displays basic settings to be used for binding a pool.
Advanced Settings
Displays default advanced settings to be used for binding a
pool.
Advanced
Click Advanced to modify the default settings displayed under
Advanced Settings.
Physical disks to configure the
pool
Displays details of physical disks used to configure a pool.
176
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
Check if the list has any problems. If the list has no problems, click Set to display the confirmation
dialog box.
Click Yes to perform pool binding. When the binding is completed, the completion page appears.
 When a physical disk to be used has stopped with the power saving
function on, it takes time to bind the pool.
 When the first pool is bound, a system volume (8GB) is automatically
created.
177
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
6.2.3.3 Pool Bind - Completion
When the pool binding is successfully completed, the result of pool binding appears.
Figure 6-14: Pool Bind - Completion.
Parameter
Description
Bind another pool
Click this hyperlink to reopen the Pool Bind page to bind
another pool.
Bind hot spare
Click this hyperlink to open the Hot Spare Bind page.
Bind logical disk
Click this hyperlink to open the Logical Disk Bind page.
Perform the following steps:
1. Click Bind hot spare to bind a hot spare.
2. If you do not want to bind a hot spare, click Bind logical disk to move on to logical disk binding.
178
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
6.2.4 Binding a Hot Spare
This section explains how to bind hot spare.
6.2.4.1 Hot Spare Bind
The Hot Spare Bind page has the view display and the list display. The displays can be switched by
clicking the tabs.
Figure 6-15: Hot Spare Bind - List Display
179
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
Figure 6-16: Hot Spare Bind - View Display
180
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
Parameter
Description
List
By default, the List view is displayed. The List view displays
a list of physical disks available to bind a spare. Select the
specified check box of the physical disk for which hot spare
will be bound.
View
Click this tab for the visual display of physical disks
available to bind a spare. Select the specified check box of
the physical disk for which hot spare will be bound.
Pool list
Select a physical disk to create a hot spare.
When you select the physical disk for hot spare binding,
Enabled is displayed under the Enable Hot Spare field of
the Pool list. Pools that are enabled by a newly bound hot
spare are shown in bold letters.
Enable the copy back mode
Select this option to enable copy back mode.
When a faulty disk is replaced by a new disk, copy back
mode automatically copies back the data to the new disk.
Perform the following steps to bind a hot spare:
1. Select one or more physical disks for hot spare binding.
 For slots having no physical disks, the slot names and check boxes
are grayed out in the visual display, and the slots are not listed in the
list display.
 For physical disks for which a pool has been bound, the check boxes
are grayed out in the visual display, and the disks are not listed in the
list display.
2. Click Set to display the confirmation dialog box.
3. Click Yes to perform hot spare binding.
181
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
6.2.4.2 Hot Spare Bind - Completion
When the hot spare binding is completed, the result dialog box appears.
Figure 6-17: Hot Spare Bind - Completion
Parameter
Description
Bind another hot spare
Click this hyperlink to reopen the Hot Spare Bind page to
bind another hot spare.
Bind pool
Click this hyperlink to open the Pool Bind page to bind
another pool.
Bind logical disk
Click this hyperlink to open the Logical Disk Bind page.
To bind a logical disk, click Bind logical disk.
182
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
6.2.5 Binding Logical Disk
This section explains how to bind a logical disk.
6.2.5.1 Logical Disk Bind
Figure 6-18: Logical Disk Bind
Parameter
Description
Pool list
Displays details of already bound pools. Select a pool in
which logical disks will be bound.
Show all pools
By clearing this check box, you can view only the pool that
is bound this time.
183
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Show logical disks of the selected
pool
Click this button to confirm a list of logical disks that are
bound in the currently selected pool.
Number of logical disks
Specify the number of logical disks to be bound in the
spinner.
Logical disk capacity
Specify the capacity of logical disks to be bound in the
spinner.
Logical disk capacity
Indicates the capacity of a single logical disk.
Capacity logical disks consume
Indicates total size of the space occupied by logical disks.
Unused capacity of the pool
Indicates free space available in a pool.
Logical disk name
Enter a logical disk name. If two or more logical disks are
bound, enter the prefix for them.
Select a pool in which logical disks will be bound, enter the number and capacity of logical disks, and
click Next.
184
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
6.2.5.2 Logical Disk Bind - Confirmation
The settings of the logical disk to be bound are listed. Confirm the logical disk binding settings.
Figure 6-19: Logical Disk Bind - Confirmation
Parameter
Description
Basic logical disk settings
Displays the basic settings to be used for binding logical
disks.
Pool information
Displays pool information.
185
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Logical Disk Advanced Settings
Displays default advanced settings to be used for binding a
logical disk.
Advanced
Click Advanced to modify the default settings displayed
under Logical Disk Advanced Settings.
Logical disks to be bound
Displays the details of the logical disks to be bound.
Perform the following steps for binding a logical disk:
1. The settings of the logical disk to be bound are listed. Confirm the settings.
2. To perform advanced settings, click Advanced.
3. After confirming the settings, click Set to display the confirmation message.
4. Click Yes to perform the logical disk binding.
186
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
6.2.5.3 Logical Disk Bind - Completion
The result of the logical disk binding appears.
Figure 6-20: Logical Disk Bind - Completion
Parameter
Description
Bind another logical disk
Click this hyperlink to reopen the Logical Disk Bind page
for another logical disk binding.
Assign logical disks to the host
Click this hyperlink to open the Assignment of Logical
Disk page.
To assign the bound logical disk to a host, click Assign logical disks to the host.
187
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
6.2.6 Assigning Logical Disk
6.2.6.1 Assignment of Logical Disk
Assign logical disks to a host.
Figure 6-21: Assignment of Logical Disk
Parameter
Description
Host List
Displays hosts registered with the disk array.
Click a host to which you want to assign logical disks.
Add unlisted host
Click this button to display a host addition page on which
another host can be added.
Show all assignable logical disks
Select this check box to display all logical disks that can be
assigned.
Select drop-down list
Select the logical disk list display type from the drop-down
list.
LD List
Displays host information registered with the disk array.
Click a logical disk you want to assign.
Select logical disks to assign to host.
188
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
 The display items can be sorted, however, the order cannot be changed.
 Multiple logical disks can be selected at a time.
Perform the following steps:
1. Select hosts from the Host List to which logical disks will be assigned.
2. Select logical disks from the LD List to which hosts will be assigned.
3. Click Next.
The host information is not displayed in Host List when no host information is registered.
Click Add unlisted host button.
See.Section P.2: “Registering host information manually (iSCSI)”.
189
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
6.2.6.2 Assignment of Logical Disk - Confirm
Figure 6-22: Assignment of Logical Disk - Confirm
Parameter
Description
Host List
Displays the host to which logical disks will be assigned.
LDs Assignable to Host
Displays logical disks to be assigned to the host.
Change LUN
Click this button to open the LUN Settings page, which
allows configuring LUN (Logical Unit Number) settings.
Check the setting and click Set to perform the logical disk assignation. When the assignation is
completed, the completion page appears.
190
User Guide
Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
6.2.6.3 Assignment of Logical Disk - Finish
Figure 6-23: Assignment of Logical Disk - Finish
Parameter
Description
Assign other logical disks to the host
Click this hyperlink to assign another logical disk to the
host.
The initialization is now complete. Click Finish.
191
Chapter 6 Initializing a Disk Array (iSCSI)
User Guide
6.3 Checking Connection from Application Servers
Check connection from the application servers by following the procedure described in one of the
following:
 For a Windows environment without iSCSI HW initiator, see Section C.3: “Checking Connection
from Application Server”.
 For a Windows environment with iSCSI HW initiator, see Section D.2: “Setting up iSCSI Software
Initiator”.
 For a Linux environment, see Section F.3: “Checking Connection from Application Server”.
 For a VMware environment, see Section H.2: “Checking Connection from Application Server”
192
Chapter 7 Installing Optional Parts
This chapter describes the preparation and installation of the optional parts of a disk array unit.
In this chapter
“Optional Parts” on page 194
“Preparation” on page 198
“Installation and Removal” on page 199
193
Chapter 7 Installing Optional Parts
User Guide
7.1 Optional Parts
Optional parts for disk array units are shown below.
Table 7-1: Optima3600 Optional Parts
Product Name
Qty.
Remark
DAC cabinet
1
Two AC power supplies installed
Host Port Extension (HPE)
(8 Gbps, 4 ports, FC)
1
Double
Host Port Extension (HPE)
(1 Gbps, 2 ports, iSCSI)
1
Double
Host Port Extension (HPE)
(10 Gbps, 2 ports, iSCSI)
1
Double
Standard cache module
(12 GB)
1
Two controllers
Standard cache module
(24 GB)
1
Two controllers
Standard cache module
(48 GB)
1
Two controllers
Additional cache module
(12 GB -> 24 GB)
1
Two controllers
Additional cache module
(12 GB -> 48 GB)
1
Two controllers
Additional cache module
(24 GB -> 48 GB)
1
Two controllers
Disk Enclosure (DE) for
3.5-inch disk drives
1
Two AC power supplies installed
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
Disk Enclosure (DE) for
2.5-inch disk drives
1
Two AC power supplies installed
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
3.5-inch SAS disk drive
1
15Krpm/300GB SAS disk drive
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
3.5-inch SAS disk drive
1
15Krpm/450GB SAS disk drive
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
3.5-inch SAS disk drive
1
15Krpm/600GB (Standard) SAS
disk drive
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
194
User Guide
Installing Optional Parts
Table 7-1: Optima3600 Optional Parts
Product Name
Qty.
Remark
3.5-inch SAS disk drive
1
15Krpm/600GB (Encryption) SAS
disk drive
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
3.5-inch NL-SAS disk drive
1
7.2Krpm/1TB NL-SAS disk drive
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
3.5-inch NL-SAS disk drive
1
7.2Krpm/2TB NL-SAS disk drive
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
3.5-inch NL-SAS disk drive
1
7.2Krpm/3TB NL-SAS disk drive
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
2.5-inch SAS disk drive
1
10Krpm/900GB SAS disk drive
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
3.5-inch SSD
1
6Gbps/100GB SSD
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
3.5-inch SSD
1
6Gbps/400GB SSD
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
2.5-inch SAS disk drive
1
10Krpm/300GB SAS disk drive
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
2.5-inch SAS disk drive
1
10Krpm/450GB SAS disk drive
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
2.5-inch SAS disk drive
1
10Krpm/600GB (Standard) SAS
disk drive
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
2.5-inch SAS disk drive
1
10Krpm/600GB (Encryption) SAS
disk drive
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
2.5-inch NL-SAS disk drive
1
7.2Krpm/1TB NL-SAS disk drive
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
2.5-inch SSD
1
6Gbps/100GB SSD
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
2.5-inch SSD
1
6Gbps/400GB SSD
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
195
Chapter 7 Installing Optional Parts
User Guide
Table 7-1: Optima3600 Optional Parts
Product Name
Qty.
Remark
DAC cabinet
1
Two AC power supplies installed
Disk Enclosure (DE) for
3.5-inch disk drives
1
Two AC power supplies installed
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
Disk Enclosure (DE) for
2.5-inch disk drives
1
Two AC power supplies installed
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
DE Adapter Card
1
Double
DAC cabinet
1
Two AC power supplies installed
Disk Enclosure (DE) for
3.5-inch disk drives
1
Two AC power supplies installed
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
Disk Enclosure (DE) for
2.5-inch disk drives
1
Two AC power supplies installed
Common to
Optima1600/Optima2600 Series
Table 7-2: Optional Parts For All Series
Product Name
Qty.
Remark
Front bezel
1
HDD carrier for 3.5-inch disk drives
1
-
Dummy HDD carrier for 3.5-inch
disk drives
1
-
HDD carrier for 2.5-inch disk drives
1
-
Dummy HDD carrier for 2.5-inch
disk drives
1
-
The NL-SAS disk drive cannot be mixed in the same pool as the SAS disk drive. The
operation will fail if they are mixed in the same pool. If the operation fails, a pool will be
built that appears to have a capacity of 0, but this pool cannot be used and should be
removed.
Confirm whether such a pool has been created before using the disk array unit.
196
User Guide
Installing Optional Parts
Disk Drive Features
The disk drives that can be connected to the disk array unit are:
 SSD - Most superior in reliability and random access performance due to having no mechanical
parts (motor, head, media), unlike HDD.
 SAS HDD - Superior in reliability and performance. Used in critical tasks requiring high
performance/non-stop function.
 Nearline SAS HDD - High capacity disk that is suitable as a back up or archive disk. Can be used
for regular, relatively low burden work (random access I/O) offered at a low price. Because it has
both high capacity and low performance, failure recovery time is longer than that of SAS HDD.
In terms of reliability, RAID-60 and RAID-TM, which have duplicate redundancy, are
recommended.
 A 3.5-inch NL-SAS 3 TB Disk Drive can be used only by Storage Manager Ver.7.4 or later.
 A 2.5-inch SAS 900 GB Disk Drive can be used by Storage Manager Ver.7.3 or later.
 A 3.5-inch 100 GB SDD can be used only by Storage Manager Ver.7.5 or later.
 A 2.5-inch 400 GB SDD can be used by Storage Manager Ver.7.5 or later.
Table 7-3: Disk Drive Features
SSD
15 Krpm SAS
HDD
10 Krpm SAS
HDD
7.2 Krpm Nearline
SAS HDD
Reliability
Optimal
High
High
Low
Performance
Optimal
High
Average
Low
Higher random
access
performance than
SATA
Purpose
 High random
access
performance
 Mission-critical
 Low power
consumption
 High capacity
 High
transaction
 High
reliability
 Low noise
197
 Backup/archive
 Regular,
low-burden work
(random access
I/O)
Chapter 7 Installing Optional Parts
User Guide
7.2 Preparation
Review the following precautions and procedures when installing options to the disk array unit.
 Although users can install optional products themselves, Bull assumes no responsibility for damage
to the disk array unit or components or for effects resulting from use if they do so. It is
recommended that this work be performed by maintenance engineers of your maintenance service
agent who have detailed expert knowledge about the disk array unit.
 Use optional parts and cables specified by Bull. There is a charge for repairs associated with
malfunction, failure, or damage to the unit that occurs as a result of using parts other than those
specified.
About electrostatic countermeasures
Be extremely careful of static electricity during installation as it could damage the parts.
 Wear a wrist strap (armband or antistatic gloves)
 Location
 Install on a floor for which measures to prevent static electricity have been taken or on concrete.
 If installing on a carpet or other location prone to static electricity, do the work after taking
measures to prevent static electricity.
 Use of mat
 Place the disk array unit on an antistatic mat and install the parts.
 Clothing
 Do not install parts while wearing clothing made of wool or synthetic fibers.
 Wear antistatic shoes while installing.
 Prior to installation, remove items made of metal (for example: rings, bracelets, and watches).
 Handling the parts
 Keep the parts to install in antistatic bags until inserting them in the disk array unit.
 Hold each part by its edge and do not touch the pins or mounting parts.
 When storing or transporting the parts, keep them in antistatic bags for protection.
198
User Guide
Installing Optional Parts
7.3 Installation and Removal
Perform the following procedures to install or remove the concerned optional part of a disk array unit:
7.3.1 Front Bezel
The procedures described in this section is intended for the front bezel of DE. The front
bezel of DAC can be inserted and removed following the same procedures.
Inserting a front bezel
The procedure for inserting a front bezel is as follows:
1. To install a front bezel, first unlock it by turning the key to the horizontal position.
Figure 7-1: Key of the Front Bezel
2. Catch the left side of the front bezel on the hook of the unit.
199
Chapter 7 Installing Optional Parts
User Guide
Figure 7-2: Inserting the Front Bezel (1)
3. Catch the right side of the front bezel, too. Then lock it by turning the key counterclockwise.
Installation of the front bezel is now complete.
Figure 7-3: Inserting the Front Bezel (2)
200
User Guide
Installing Optional Parts
Removing a front bezel
The procedure for removing a front bezel is as follows:
1. Release the lock by turning the key clockwise.
2. Pull the right side towards you by pivoting the left end, detach the left side, and pull the entire bezel
towards you.
Figure 7-4: Removing the Front Bezel
7.3.2 Host Port Extension (HPE)
Removing a Host Port Extension
The procedure for removing a host port extension from its cabinet is as follows:
1. Confirm that the power is turned off.
2. Confirm that the cable of the host port extension is not connected.
3. Pull out the host port extension by pushing its handle downward.
Installing a Host Port Extension
The procedure for installing a host port extension in the cabinet is as follows.
1. Confirm that the power is turned off.
2. Remove dummy canister if it is installed in a host port extension slot of the cabinet.
3. Insert the host port extension, press until it is fully inserted, and then make sure it is locked.
If the host port extension is not fully inserted, it could lead to malfunction.
201
Chapter 7 Installing Optional Parts
User Guide
7.3.3 Disk Drives
For details about how to install disk drives, see Section 3.2.3: “Installing Disk Drives”.
Removing a Disk Drive
The procedure for removing the disk drive is as follows:
1. Release the lock on the ejector of the disk drive, and pull the drive forward at an angle of about 40°.
Before pulling the ejector forward, wait about 30 seconds for the disk drive to fully stop
(HDD only).
2. Hold the target disk drive firmly while slowly pulling it from its slot.
Figure 7-5: Removing the Disk Drive
3. Close the ejector of the disk drive.
202
User Guide
Installing Optional Parts
7.3.4 Disk Enclosures
For installing and removing disk enclosures, see the sections below.
7.3.4.1 Mounting Disk Enclosures on Rack
See Section 3.2.2: “Mounting a Disk Enclosure on a Rack”.
7.3.4.2 Connecting Disk Enclosures
When connecting a disk enclosure, use a SAS cable to connect DPx on the disk array unit with the
DP0-IN on the disk enclosure. If connecting multiple disk enclosures, use a SAS cable to connect
DP0-OUT on a disk enclosure with DP0-IN on the next disk enclosure.
Figure 7-6: SAS Cable Connection
Do not connect to the DP1-IN (on the left of DP0-IN).
203
Chapter 7 Installing Optional Parts
User Guide
Figure 7-7: Cables and Connectors
 Push the SAS cable into each connector securely until you hear a click.
 SAS cables can also be used to control the disk enclosure’s power supply.
 The disk enclosure will not power on unless the 2 SAS cables are
connected.
 SAS cables have grooves in the connecting portion that protect against incorrect
insertion.
 Select a connector appropriate to the port to which it will be connected and connect the
cable.
204
User Guide
Installing Optional Parts
7.3.4.3 SAS Cable Connections and DE and PD Numbers
The number of disk enclosures show below can be connected to this disk array unit.
Figure 7-8: SAS Cable Connections and DE/PD Numbers shows how to connect disk enclosures. The
DE and PD numbers are described following the figure.
Figure 7-8: SAS Cable Connections and DE/PD Numbers
The number of DEs that can be connected to a disk port (DP) of DPE differs depending on the type of
DE to be connected.
 Total number of disk drives supported by the disk array: 384
 Number of disk drives that can be connected to a DP: 96
 When connecting only 3.5-inch DEs, up to eight DEs can be connected.
 When connecting only 2.5-inch DEs, up to four DEs can be connected.
For the Optima3600 Series, connection of the basic DE (DE 00 in the figure below) is required.
205
Chapter 7 Installing Optional Parts
User Guide
206
User Guide
Installing Optional Parts
7.3.5 Batteries (BBU)
For installing and removing the battery (BBU), follow the procedure given below:
1. Confirm that the disk array has been powered off.
2. Remove the BBU.
Remove the screws on the front of the BBU, and pull it.
3. Insert a new BBU.
Straight and fully insert the target BBU. Then, anchor it by tightening the screws on the front of the
BBU.
7.3.6 Cache Modules
For installing and removing the cache modules, follow the procedure given below:
 DIMMs and Flash Memory ASSYs composing the cache module are
precision machines. Protect them from any shock or vibration.
 Cache modules are electrical parts. When handling them, take an
anti-static measure such as using a wrist strap.
1. Confirm that the disk array has been powered off.
2. Remove the controller (CONT) from its cabinet.
(1) Loosen the screws on the both ejectors on the controller (CONT).
(2) Pull and open the ejectors. Then the controller (CONT) comes out.
(3) Remove the controller by holding it with both hands.
3. Remove three DIMMs.
Push the levers on both sides of the DIMM sockets outward, and then remove the DIMMs from each
socket by pulling them upward.
4. Insert new DIMMs.
Open the levers of the DIMM sockets, and then insert three new DIMMs into the sockets straight.
Fit the notch of the DIMM terminal to the wrong insertion prevention part of the socket.
Push the inserted DIMM all the way in, lock the DIMM and socket by putting the levers inside.
5. Remove the Flash Memory ASSYs.
(1) Unlock the Flash Memory ASSY fixture.
(2) Among four Flash Memory ASSYs, Remove three Flash Memory ASSYs; PDOM1, PDOM2, and
PDOM3, from the socket by pulling it upward.
Do not remove Flash Memory ASSY “PDOMS”. Doing so might cause the
disk array to not reboot.
207
Chapter 7 Installing Optional Parts
User Guide
6. Installing new Flash Memory ASSYs.
(1) Insert new Flash Memory ASSYs to the sockets.
(2) Lock the fixture.
7. Install the controller (CONT) to its cabinet.
(1) Hold the both ejector on the controller (CONT), and then unlock and pull the ejectors open.
(2) Fully insert the controller (CONT) to its cabinet.
(3) Close the ejectors. If the controller (CONT) is out of its cabinet, insert it again because it was not
correctly inserted. After confirming that the controller (CONT) is correctly inserted, tighten the
screws of the ejectors.
208
Chapter 8 Changes to the Configuration
This chapter describes how to change the settings of a disk array unit after use of the disk array unit is started.
In this chapter
“Modifying the Settings by Using DIP Switches” on page 210
“Modifying the Configuration by Storage Manager (FC)” on page 211
“Modifying the Configuration by Storage Manager (iSCSI)” on page 214
209
Chapter 8 Changes to the Configuration
User Guide
8.1 Modifying the Settings by Using DIP Switches
The OptimaX600 series does not require modification of the settings by using DIP switches. Do not
change the configuration of the DIP switches located on the surface of the controller.
Figure 8-1: DIP Switch
210
User Guide
Changes to the Configuration
8.2 Modifying the Configuration by Storage Manager (FC)
This section provides information on modifying the configuration of an FC connected disk array by
Storage Manager.
8.2.1 Binding Additional Logical Disks (FC)
This section describes how to bind additional logical disks on an FC connected disk array.
To bind additional logical disks on an FC connected disk array, click Configuration, Logical Disk and
Logical Disk Bind on the left pane of the window.
See Section 8.2.2: “Adding Application Servers” to bind additional logical disks when an application
server is added.
Figure 8-2: Binding a Logical Disk (FC)
For the details of the procedure after the startup, see Section 5.3.4: “Binding Logical Disks”.
211
Chapter 8 Changes to the Configuration
User Guide
8.2.2 Adding Application Servers
This section describes how to add logical disks and an application server to an initialized disk array.
1. Collect the host information on the application server
First of all, collect the host information on the application server to be newly added.
For details about collecting the host information of application servers, see Section 5.2: “Collecting
Host Information From Application Servers”.
2. Retrieve the host information
Retrieve the host information of the application server.
Click Host > Host Operation > Host information collection on the menu located on the left of the
window to open the window for retrieving the host information.
3. Bind a pool
Bind a pool if logical disks should be bound not on an existing pool but on a pool that is newly
bound.
4. Bind logical disks
Bind logical disks to be assigned to the new application server.
Figure 8-3: Logical Disk Bind (FC)
Click Configuration, Logical Disk and Logical Disk Bind on the left pane of the window to start
binding the logical disks.
The rest of the procedure is the same as the procedure in Section 5.3.4: “Binding Logical Disks”.
212
User Guide
Changes to the Configuration
5. Assign the logical disks to the host
Lastly, assign the logical disks you have created to the application server.
On the Logical Disk Binding Completion window, click Assign logical disk to the host to start
assigning the logical disks.
The rest of the procedure is the same as the procedure in Section 5.3.5: “Collecting Host
Information”.
8.2.3 Using the Initialization Wizard to Modify the Configuration
The configuration can be modified by re-running the initialization wizard.
The procedure is the same as the procedure for the first settings. For details of the procedure see
Section 5.3.1: “Initialization Wizard”.
When you re-run the initialization wizard, Storage Manager issues a message asking whether to stop
monitoring of the target disk array by Storage Manager and to proceed with the initialization. Click Yes
and stop monitoring of the disk array to modify the configuration.
Figure 8-4: Message Asking Whether to Stop Monitoring
8.2.4 Modifying the Disk Array Configuration
Each setting configured by the initialization wizard can be modified individually.
See Table 8-1: Relation between the initialization wizard and configuration settings to find how the
settings configured in the initialization wizard and configuration settings are related.
Table 8-1: Relation between the initialization wizard and configuration settings
Setting in the initialization wizard
How to modify the setting
Set Disk Array Subsystem Name
Select Disk Array > Disk Array Management >
Change of Settings.
Time Settings
Select Disk Array > Time Settings.
License Unlock
Select Disk Array > License Unlock.
Host Connection Port Parameters (FC)
Select Disk Array > Host Connection Port > Host
Connection Port Setting (FC).
Port Mode Switching
Select Disk Array > Host Connection Port > Port
Mode Switching.
213
Chapter 8 Changes to the Configuration
User Guide
8.3 Modifying the Configuration by Storage Manager (iSCSI)
This section provides information on modifying the configuration of an iSCSI connected disk array by
Storage Manager.
8.3.1 Binding Additional Logical Disks (iSCSI)
This section describes how to bind additional logical disks on an iSCSI connected disk array.
To bind additional logical disks on an iSCSI connected disk array, click Configuration and Logical
Disk, and Logical Disk Bind on the left pane of the window.
Figure 8-5: Binding a Logical Disk (iSCSI)
For the details of the procedure after the startup, see Section 6.2.5: “Binding Logical Disk”.
214
User Guide
Changes to the Configuration
8.3.2 Using the Initialization Wizard to Modify the Configuration
The configuration can be modified by re-running the initialization wizard.
The procedure is the same as the procedure for the first settings. For details of the procedure see,
Section 6.2.1: “Initialization Wizard”.
When you re-run the initialization wizard, Storage Manager issues a message asking whether to stop
monitoring of the target disk array by Storage Manager and to proceed with the initialization. Click Yes
and stop monitoring of the disk array to modify the configuration.
Figure 8-6: Message Asking Whether to Stop Monitoring
8.3.3 Modifying the Disk Array Configuration
Each setting configured by the initialization wizard can be modified individually.
See Table 8-2: Relation between the initialization wizard and configuration settings to find how the
settings configured in the initialization wizard and configuration settings are related.
Table 8-2: Relation between the initialization wizard and configuration settings
Setting in the initialization wizard
How to modify the setting
Set Disk Array Subsystem Name
Select Disk Array > Disk Array Management >
Change of Settings.
Time Settings
Select Disk Array > Time Settings.
Setting host connection port parameters
(iSCSI)
Select Disk Array > Host Connection Port > Host
Connection Port Settings (iSCSI).
Setting iSNS server
Select Disk Array > iSNS Server Settings.
License Unlock
Select Disk Array > License Unlock.
215
Chapter 8 Changes to the Configuration
User Guide
216
Chapter 9 Troubleshooting
This chapter provides information on troubles and what should be done for troubles.
In this chapter
“Troubleshooting According to Device Conditions” on page 218
“Network Setting Tool Errors” on page 225
“Storage Manager Errors” on page 226
“iSCSI Setup Tool Errors” on page 234
“StoreWay Multipath (Windows) Errors” on page 241
“StoreWay Multipath (Linux) Errors” on page 243
“StoreWay Multipath (Linux) Errors” on page 243
“Troubleshooting at Installation” on page 246
“SAS Connection Errors” on page 250
217
User Guide
Troubleshooting
9.1 Troubleshooting According to Device Conditions
In this section, troubles are classified as follows, according to the location where the trouble occurs.
1. Trouble in disk array unit (front panel LED status): See Table 9-1: Trouble in Disk Array Unit (Front
Panel LED Status)
2. Trouble in disk array unit (rear panel controller LED status): See Table 9-2: Trouble in Disk Array
Unit (Rear Panel Controller LED Status)
3. Trouble in disk array unit or disk enclosure (rear panel power LED status): See Table 9-3: Trouble in
Disk Array Unit or Enclosure (Rear Panel Power LED Status)
4. Trouble in disk enclosure: See Table 9-4: Trouble in Disk Enclosure
5. Wrong SAS cable connection: See Table 9-5: Wrong SAS Cable Connection
6. Trouble in linkup of host port: See Table 9-6: Trouble in Linkup of Host Port
Table 9-1: Trouble in Disk Array Unit (Front Panel LED Status)
Condition
Cause and Action
POWER LED (green) is
on, and SERVICE LED
(orange) is off
This is not a fault.
POWER LED (green)
and SERVICE LED
(orange) are off
This indicates the disk array unit power-on sequence has not been
completed.
This indicates that the disk array unit is in normal operation after turning
on.
It takes several minutes for the POWER LED to turn on after turning on
the unit.
If LEDs do not turn on within 10 minutes, check the following:
 Confirm that power is being supplied to the unit.
 Confirm that INPUT GOOD LED on the back of the unit is on. If it is
off, check the cable connection and power source.
POWER LED (green)
and SERVICE LED
(orange) are on
This indicates that the disk array unit or connected disk enclosure
requires maintenance. Since there are two or more maintenance
requests at the same time, check all of the following:
 Confirm that power is being supplied to both PS0 and PS1 in the disk
array unit or connected disk enclosure.
To ensure that power is being supplied, confirm that POWER LEDs of
the disk array unit and disk enclosure are on.
 When SERVICE LED of the connected disk enclosure is on, refer to
the description of "SERVICE LED is on".
 When the last operation is maintenance, processing such as disk
recovery may take time. Ask the maintenance personnel for the
estimated time of completion. If the disk is not recovered beyond the
estimated time, ask the maintenance personnel to investigate.
218
User Guide
Troubleshooting
Table 9-1: Trouble in Disk Array Unit (Front Panel LED Status) (Contd.)
Condition
Cause and Action
POWER LED (green) is
on and SERVICE LED
(orange) blinks at
intervals (on for 1
second and off for 1
second)
This indicates that the power-on sequence or download sequence of the
disk array unit is in progress.
The sequence will take several minutes to complete.
If SERVICE LED continues to blink for over 10 minutes, there may be a
failure.
Do not turn off the power or AC power while
SERVICE LED is blinking.
POWER LED (green) is
on and SERVICE LED
(orange) blinks at
intervals (on for 4
seconds and off for 8
seconds)
This indicates that battery backup failed in the last power-off state. Files
may be corrupted. Restore those files using backup files.
This may occur because of the following causes. Address the
appropriate cause to remove the problem.
1. A backup device such as a flash memory was destroyed. Replace the
controller.
2. Battery backup was performed past the battery life span.
3. The disk array unit was continuously used or has been used at a
temperature higher than the predetermined temperature.
In the cases other than 1, the battery backup
retention time of the battery cannot be
guaranteed. It is necessary to replace the battery
due to its life span. Contact your sales or
maintenance service agent. (There is a charge
for battery exchange due to life span.)
For the procedure to recover from this condition,
refer to Section 1.3.1.3: “Notes on Powering On
the Disk Array System”.
POWER LED (green)
blinks at intervals (on for
0.2 seconds and off for
0.2 seconds), and
SERVICE LED (orange)
is off
This is not a fault.
This indicates that the disk array unit can be turned off by performing
automatic flash because the host port is disconnecting for 5 minutes.
When the host port recovers, the unit returns to a normal state.
219
User Guide
Troubleshooting
Table 9-2: Trouble in Disk Array Unit (Rear Panel Controller LED Status)
Condition
Cause and Action
READY LED (green) is
on, and FAULT LED
(orange) is off
This indicates that the power-on sequence or rebooting is in progress.
READY LED (green)
blinks (on for 1 second
and off for 1 second),
and FAULT LED
(orange) is off
This is not a fault.
READY LED (green)
blinks rapidly, and
FAULT LED (orange) is
off
This indicates that power has been disrupted, or automatic shutdown or
memory backup is being performed.
READY LED (green) is
on, and FAULT LED
(orange) blinks (on for 1
second and off for 1
second)
This indicates that subsequent disk enclosures are not turned on. Turn
on the disk enclosures.
READY LED (green)
and FAULT LED
(orange) are on
This indicates that there is a maintenance request because a failure was
detected. Analyze the error and then remove the cause.
READY LED (green)
blinks (on for 1 second
and off for 1 second),
and FAULT LED
(orange) is on
The subsequent disk enclosures cannot be found, or the disk ports are
disconnected.
READY LED (green)
blinks (on for 1 second
and off for 1 second),
and FAULT LED
(orange) rapidly blinks
This is not a fault.
BBU FAULT LED
(orange) is on
This is not a fault.
The sequence will take several minutes to complete.
If this condition continues for over 10 minutes, there may be a failure.
This indicates that the controller is in normal operation.
The sequence will take several minutes to complete.
If this condition continues for over 10 minutes, there may be a failure.
Check whether the cables are correctly connected to the disk ports.
This indicates that device firmware is being updated. When updating is
complete, the device returns to a normal state.
The battery is being recharged.
220
User Guide
Troubleshooting
Table 9-2: Trouble in Disk Array Unit (Rear Panel Controller LED Status) (Contd.)
Condition
Cause and Action
LNK/ACT LED (green)
of the management port
is out, or blinks
When connecting a cable to the management port, LNK/ACT LED
(green) may not turn on because of the following causes.
 The power of the HUB, switch, or server to connect to has not been
turned on.
 The power supply of the HUB, switch, or server to connect to is at
fault.
 The cable type is wrong.
A cross cable and straight cable are not recognized automatically. Use
a cable following the predetermined connection method.
 The Speed and Duplex settings do not match.
Auto Detect is set as default. Since connecting to a device in Full
Duplex mode could cause abnormal operation, set Auto Detect or Half
Duplex to the device to connect.
(To set Full Duplex, ask your sales or maintenance service agent.)
 Depending on the type of hub, it may remain off or it may blink.
SPEED LED
(Green/orange) of the
management port is on
or blinks
This is not a fault.
SPEED LED (Green/orange) is on when connection is established
through the disk array unit monitoring protocol with a cable connected to
the management port. If the cable is removed from the unit, SPEED LED
briefly remains on.
Table 9-3: Trouble in Disk Array Unit or Enclosure (Rear Panel Power LED Status)
Condition
Cause and Action
INPUT GOOD LED
(green) is on, FAULT
LED (orange) is off, and
DC GOOD LED (green)
is on
This is not a fault.
INPUT GOOD LED
(green) is off.
AC input is not being supplied.
INPUT GOOD LED
(green), FAULT LED
(orange), and DC
GOOD LED (green) are
on
This indicates that the power fan error was detected or the temperature
within the power supply reached the warning value (the detected
temperature was more than 55 degrees Celsius (131 degrees F)).
This indicates that AC input is being supplied to the unit and DC output is
in normal operation.
Check whether the power supply cable is correctly connected. If the
cable is correctly connected, replace the power supply.
The unit has dual power supply configuration.
Therefore, SERVICE LED turns on when FAULT
LEDs of both PS0 and PS1 are on.
221
User Guide
Troubleshooting
Table 9-3: Trouble in Disk Array Unit or Enclosure (Rear Panel Power LED Status) (Contd.)
Condition
Cause and Action
INPUT GOOD LED
(green) is on, FAULT
LED (orange) is on, and
DC GOOD LED (green)
is off
This indicates that DC output error or temperature error within the power
supply (the detected temperature was more than 60 degrees Celsius
(140 degrees F) was detected.
STANDBY GOOD LED
(green) is on
This is not a fault.
The unit has a dual power supply configuration.
Therefore, SERVICE LED turns on when FAULT
LEDs of both PS0 and PS1 are on.
The disk array unit is in standby state.
Table 9-4: Trouble in Disk Enclosure
Condition
Cause and Action
POWER LED (green) is
on, and SERVICE LED
(orange) is off
This is not a fault.
POWER LED (green) is
off
This indicates that starting the disk enclosure has not been completed.
This indicates that the disk enclosure is in normal operation after turning
on.
The power of the disk enclosure is turned on in conjunction with the
power of the connected disk enclosure or disk array unit.
It takes several minutes until POWER LED of the disk enclosure turns on
after turning on the unit power.
If POWER LED does not turn on within 10 minutes, check the following.
 Check whether INPUT GOOD LED of the disk enclosure power supply
is on, indicating that the power is supplied to the disk enclosure.
 Check cable connection status to confirm whether this disk enclosure
is normally connected to other disk enclosures or the disk array unit.
 Check POWER LED of the disk array unit to confirm whether the
power of the disk array unit was turned on. If this LED is out, check
whether the power source is functioning normally.
SERVICE LED (orange)
is on
This indicates that the disk enclosure is out of order or maintenance has
not been completed.
 When the last operation is maintenance, processing such as disk
recovery may take time. Ask the maintenance personnel for the
estimated time of completion. If the disk is not recovered beyond the
estimated time, ask the maintenance personnel to investigate.
222
User Guide
Troubleshooting
Table 9-5: Wrong SAS Cable Connection
Condition
Cause and Action
It is necessary to
change the disk
enclosure connection
If a pool, logical disk or spare has been built, it is necessary to release it
before changing the connection.
Turn off the disk array unit, and then change the SAS cable connection.
Next, turn on the unit, and then wait until the unit is ready.
Changing the SAS cable connection is then complete.
223
User Guide
Troubleshooting
Table 9-6: Trouble in Linkup of Host Port
Condition
Cause and Action
Logical disk in disk array
is not visible from
application server
(host).
There is possibility that "Data Rate" / "Server Connection Type" settings
are inconsistent between disk array unit and device to be connected
(host HBA / switch). Please confirm below. For details, refer to
Configuration Setting Tool User's Manual (GUI) for the Optima X600
series.
Connection between the
disk array and
destination
(host/switch/RD port)
does not linkup.
1. Confirm Server Connection Type between application server
(host)
Connection between the
disk array and
destination
(host/switch/RD port)
takes time to linkup.
This disk array unit can use auto configuration by setting "Server
Connection Type" to Auto Negotiate. But depending on settings of
switch and host HBA to be connected, there are cases that connection
does not linkup or takes time. In such cases, reconfigure "Server
Connection Type" appropriate to switch and host HBA to be
connected.
 Direct Connection/FC-AL
Select this option when you directly connect host connection port
and application server (host) with FC cable or when you use Loop
topology FC switch.
 FC Switch Connection (Fabric)
Select this option when you connect to FC switch other than Loop
topology FC switch.
2. Confirm Data Rate
This disk array unit can use auto configuration by setting "Data Rate"
of host port to Auto Negotiate. But depending on settings of switch
and host HBA to be connected, there are cases that connection does
not linkup or takes time. In such cases, reconfigure "Data Rate"
appropriate to switch and host HBA to be connected. For details of
confirming and setting data rate of host HBA / FC switch, refer to
manual of FC switch.
Connection between the
disk array and
destination
(host/switch/RD port)
does not linkup at the
maximum data rate.
For the Optima1600 Series disk array units, the default data rate of the
host port is Auto Negotiate. Therefore, automatic detection is performed.
When connection between the disk array unit and the destination switch
or host HBA cannot linkup at the maximum data rate by the disk array
unit, use the maximum data rate supported by the switch or host HBA.
224
User Guide
Troubleshooting
9.2 Network Setting Tool Errors
Problem
Cause and Solution
The target disk array is not displayed
The network between the Network Setting Tool and the disk
array may not be configured correctly. User Datagram
Protocol (UDP) and the port number "2370" are used to find
disk arrays. Check the network settings including the
firewall settings, configure the settings to allow packets to
travel through the network, and then try finding the disk
array again.
225
User Guide
Troubleshooting
9.3 Storage Manager Errors
9.3.1 Errors Experienced Throughout Storage Manager Usage
Problem
Cause and Solution
You cannot connect to the target disk
array when Storage Manager client is
started.
The IP addresses of the disk array specified may not be
correct. Use the Network Setting Tool to confirm if the
specified IP addresses of the disk array are correct. If these
IP addresses are not correct, set the IP addresses again.
The window you have been working
on is not visible.
The following factor is conceivable. Remove the factor and
try your operation again.
 The window you have been working on may be hiding
behind another window.
Switch window by pressing ALT+TAB.
When access to the disk array is
attempted from Storage Manager
Client (Web GUI), nothing is shown
on the Web browser and the status
bar, located at the bottom of the
window, shows done.
The following causes are conceivable.
 JRE is not installed.
Check JRE has been installed on the machine where
Storage Manager Client runs. If not, install JRE according
to the procedure described in .
 The security settings of the Web browser are not
configured.
Configure the Web browser settings by setting the URL
of the connecting destination as trusted sites. Also
configure the security level of trusted sites by selecting
Enable under Run ActiveX controls and plugins of
ActiveX controls and plug-ins. For details of the
settings, Section 4.5: “Starting Storage Manager Client”.
 The network is congested.
When Storage Manager Client (Web GUI) is started, it
downloads files required for its operation from the disk
array. Depending on the network traffic, it may take time.
Wait for a few minutes for the download to complete.
When access to the disk array is
attempted from Storage Manager
Client (Web GUI), the message
"Warning - Security" is shown.
This message indicates the digital signature of Storage
Manager Client has been successfully verified. Check the
name is "StorageManager" and the publisher is "Bull SAS",
and then click Run.
If you select the Always trust content from this publisher
check box and then click Run, the message will not be
shown the next time you start Storage Manager Client.
When access to the disk array is
attempted from Storage Manager
Client (Web GUI), the Windows
Security Alert dialog box tells a Web
browser function is blocked
The function is blocked by a firewall. Click Unblock on the
dialog box or configure the firewall settings in advance so
that your Web browser is not blocked.
226
User Guide
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause and Solution
When access to the disk array is
attempted from Storage Manager
Client (Web GUI), the Java icon
continues to be shown on the Web
browser window and the login
window does not appear.
The connection may fail when your Web browser is
configured to go through a proxy server. In this case,
configure the proxy exception of the Web browser so that
disk array is connected without going through a proxy
server. Follow the steps below.
Perform Step 1 through 3 only when Internet Explorer is
used.
1. Click Control Panel, and Internet Options. On the
Connections tab click LAN Settings to open the LAN
Settings dialog box.
2. If the Use a proxy server check box is not selected, the
following procedure is not necessary. If this check box is
selected, click Advanced to open the Proxy Settings
dialog box.
3. Add both the host name and the IP address to the Do not
use proxy server for addresses beginning with box.
Steps from 4 should be performed if your browser is
Internet Explorer or Firefox.
4. Follow the steps below to check the JRE proxy settings
Select Control Panel, Java and Network Setting to see
whether the User browser settings check box has been
selected. If not, click Advanced to add both the host
name and the IP address of the connecting destination to
the Exceptions box.
5.Exit and restart Web browsers.
227
User Guide
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause and Solution
When startup of Storage Manager
Client (Web GUI) is attempted, it
does not start and the message
[00008-04] is shown.
The following causes are conceivable. Check the machine
experiencing the problem.
 Protected mode is enabled.
If Internet Explorer 7 or later is used as a Web browser
and the protected mode is enabled, starting Storage
Manager Client fails. Follow the steps below to disable
the protected mode.
1.Select Control Panel and Internet Options. Click the
Security tab.
2.Click to clear Enabled Protected Mode check box of
the zone where the URL of the connecting destination
(trusted site) is set.
3.Exit and restart the Web browsers you are using, and
then try starting Storage Manager Client (Web GUI)
again.
 JRE security policy has been modified.
Installing another product may change the JRE security
policy and affect startup of Storage Manager Client (Web
GUI).
The JRE security policy is defined by the following file.
<JRE installation folder>\lib\security\java.security
If this is the cause of the problem, follow the steps below
to change the security policy.
Note that the change does not affect any behavior of
products other than Storage Manager Client (Web GUI).
1.Copy the iSMClient.policy file in the DVD-ROM shipped
with the product to the following folder.
<JRE installation folder>\
lib\security\bull
You must create the bull folder because it does not
exist by default.
The iSMClient.policy file is located in the following
folder of the DVD-ROM.
\Storage_Manager_Software_For_Windows\
Client\WINDOWS\iSMClient.policy
2.Rewrite the first line in the "iSMClient.policy" file that
has been copied by the IP address (host name) and the
port number of the connecting destination.
3.Add the following line indicated by the * mark to the
java.security file located in the following folder.
228
User Guide
Problem
Troubleshooting
Cause and Solution
<JRE installation
folder>\lib\security\java.security
-----------------------------------------policy.url.1=file...
policy.url.2=file...
policy.url.<no>=file:${java.home}/lib/
security/bull/iSMClient.policy *
-----------------------------------------Specify the next number of described policy.url in where
<no> is.
While a controller failure occurs, it
takes time from 20 minutes to 30
minutes to process the configuration
of the disk array from Storage
Manager Client.
A controller failure may cause the delay of processes.
Configure the disk array after restoration of the controller.
If you have to configure the disk array while a controller
failure occurs, take the following measure:
 When Storage Manager Express is being used
Configure the disk array by using CLI (Command Line
Interface).
For details of CLI, see Storage Manager Command
Reference.
 When Storage Manager is being used
Remove once the IP address of the faulty controller from
a monitoring target of Storage Manager, and restart the
server.
Add the IP address again after restoration of the
controller, and restart Storage Manager Server.
229
User Guide
Troubleshooting
9.3.2 Errors in Initialization
Problem
Cause and Solution
Configuring any the following failed.
It is conceivable that a disk array problem or communication
error between the disk array and a client has occurred.
 Setting disk array subsystem
name.
 Setting the time (synchronization
with the NTP server)
Check if the disk array or the client has a problem. Fix the
problem and then perform initialization again.
 Setting the time (manually)
 Unlocking a license
 Setting host connection port
(iSCSI)
 Setting iSNS server
 Setting host connection port (FC)
 Port mode switching
 Setting host connection port (SAS)
An error occurred in the completion
page of the initialization.
This problem may occur when the next generation Java
plug-in is not disabled.
See Section 4.5.1: “Before Starting Storage Manager
Client” to disable the next generation Java plug-in, and then
perform the initialization again.
Whenever Storage Manager is
started, the dialog prompting to start
initialization is displayed.
This problem occurs when initialization is not completed
successfully.
Start the initialization wizard and complete it successfully.
230
User Guide
Troubleshooting
9.3.3 Errors in Pool Binding
Problem
Cause and Solution
Pool binding failed.
It is conceivable that a disk array problem or communication
error between the disk array and the client has occurred.
Check if the disk array or the client has a problem.
Fix the problem and then select Pool on the tree of the main
screen to check the list of pools.
1. If there is no newly bound pool, try pool bind again.
2. If there is any newly bound pool, right-click the pool to
check its properties.
a. If the status of the pool is normal and physical disks
are displayed on the list of physical disks without any
problem, the pool has been bound successfully. You
do not need to bind the pool again.
b. If the status of the pool is not normal or physical disks
are not displayed on the list of physical disks, the
pool is bound abnormally. Use the configuration
menu to unbind the pool and then bind the pool
again.
Creating a system volume failed.
It is conceivable that a disk array problem or communication
error between the disk array and the client has occurred.
Check if the disk array or any client has a problem.
Fix the problem and then click Monitor and Fault
Information on the main screen to see the Fault
Information window.
1. When a message “System area (Logical disk number)
has become fault.” is displayed, delete the system
volume by selecting Logical Disk and Logical Disk
Unbind. Create a system volume by selecting Logical
Disk and Logical Disk Bind (for system…).
2. When a message “Storage System Volume (System
Volume) is not built.” is displayed, create a system
volume by selecting Logical Disk and Logical Disk Bind
(for system…).
If neither of the messages (1) and (2) is reported, the
system volume is successfully created. You do not need to
re-create it.
231
User Guide
Troubleshooting
9.3.4 Errors in Hot Spare Binding
Problem
Cause and Solution
Hot spare binding failed.
It is conceivable that a disk array problem or communication
error between the disk array and the client has occurred.
Check if the disk array or any client has a problem.
Fix the problem and then click physical disk on the main
screen to see the list of physical disks.
If the physical disk on which hot spare binding has been
performed is categorized as "not set", try hot spare binding
again. If the physical disk on which hot spare binding has
been performed is categorized as Hot Spare, binding hot
spare is successfully completed. You do not need to
perform hot spare binding again.
9.3.5 Errors in Logical Disk Binding
Problem
Cause and Solution
Logical disk binding failed.
It is conceivable that a disk array problem or communication
error between the disk array and the client has occurred.
Check if the disk array or the client has a problem.
Fix the problem and then select Logical Disk on the tree of
the main screen to check the list of logical disks. If all the
logical disks specified in logical disk binding are bound, the
logical disk binding has been completed successfully. You
do not need to perform the logical disk binding again. If any
logical disk specified in the logical disk binding is not bound,
perform the logical disk binding again.
232
User Guide
Troubleshooting
9.3.6 Errors in Retrieving Host Information
Problem
Cause and Solution
Automatic collection of host
information was performed but no
host is shown.
The following causes are conceivable.
1. FC cables between the disk array and hosts are not
connected correctly.
2. Storage Manager Agent Utility is not installed on the
hosts or the hosts are not running.
3. The command has not been executed on Linux hosts.
Check the following, fix the problem, and then try collecting
the host information again.
1. Check the disk array and hosts are connected correctly
with direct connection or via FC switches. Check the host
ports connectivity and accessibility.
2. Install Storage Manager Agent Utility on the hosts, start
running the hosts and try collecting the host information
again.
3. For the Linux hosts, you need to open the window to
register the host information and run the
iSMcc_hostinfo -store command on the hosts.
After running the command, click Show collected
information.
9.3.7 Assigning Logical Disk Errors
Problem
Cause and Solution
Assigning logical disks failed.
It is conceivable that a disk array unit problem or
communication error between the disk array and the client
has occurred. Check if the disk array unit or the client has a
problem. Fix the problem and then perform assigning
logical disks again.
233
User Guide
Troubleshooting
9.4 iSCSI Setup Tool Errors
9.4.1 iSCSI Setup Tool (Windows) Errors
Problem
Cause and Solution
The message, "The tool has already
been started." is displayed and the
iSCSI Setup Tool cannot be started.
The iSCSI Setup Tool is already up and running.
The message, "The host name
should be up to 15 characters in
length. A host name can include
alphanumeric characters and
hyphens(-)." is displayed and the
iSCSI Setup Tool cannot be started.
Change the host name using only alphanumeric characters
or hyphen (-) based on the restrictions of creating a target.
The message, "Failed to collect the
serial number. (Error code:xxxx)" is
displayed and the iSCSI Setup Tool
cannot be started.
An error occurred in retrieving the serial number.
The message, "The tool is not set
correctly." is displayed and the iSCSI
Setup Tool cannot be started.
The iSCSI Setup Tool is not installed correctly.
The message, "No management port
of the disk array is set." is displayed
and the iSCSI Setup Tool cannot be
started.
The management port settings of the disk array are not
configured.
The message, "An error occurred
while reporting a log file. (Error
code:xxxx)" is displayed.
An error occurred during output of the log file.
The message, "Unexpected error
occurred." is displayed.
An unexpected error occurred.
Click OK to close the error message and terminate the
running iSCSI Setup Tool. Then, start the iSCSI Setup Tool
again.
Click OK to close the error message. After changing the
host name, restart the iSCSI Setup Tool.
Click OK to close the error message.
For details, see Section 9.4.3: “iSCSI Setup Tool Error
Codes”.
Click OK to close the error message. Re-install the iSCSI
Setup Tool and start it again.
Click OK to close the error message. Set the management
port and start the iSCSI Setup Tool again.
Click OK to terminate the iSCSI Setup Tool.
For details, see Section 9.4.3: “iSCSI Setup Tool Error
Codes”.
Click OK to terminate the iSCSI Setup Tool.
Do not close the error message, generate the user dump,
the event log and the log file, and contact your maintenance
service provider.
When a serial number is entered, the
message, "No management port of
the disk array is set." is displayed.
The host post connection settings are not configured.
See Section 6.2.1: “Initialization Wizard” to perform the
initialization to configure the host connection port settings.
Then, run the iSCSI Setup Tool again.
234
User Guide
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause and Solution
When a serial number is entered, the
message, "The target has already
been assigned to the initiator. Serial
number =" is displayed.
The target with the initiator already exists.
To register the initiator again, delete the LD set to which the
initiator was added by using the LD Set management of the
Storage Manager client, and then run the iSCSI Setup Tool
again.
When a serial number is entered, the
message, "Failed to collect the disk
array information. (Error code:xxxx)"
is displayed.
An error occurred in retrieving the disk array information.
When you click Logon, the message,
"Please enter a target secret." is
displayed.
The CHAP authentication check box is selected but
information for Target secret and Target secret again is not
entered.
For details, see Section 9.4.3: “iSCSI Setup Tool Error
Codes”.
Enter information in the Target secret and the Target secret
again boxes.
When you click Logon, the message,
"Target secret unmatch. Please enter
the target secret again." is displayed.
The information entered in the Target secret does not match
with that of the Target secret again.
When you click Logon, the message,
"Please enter a CHAP secret." is
displayed.
The Mutual CHAP authentication check box is selected but
information for the CHAP secret and CHAP secret again is
not entered.
Re-enter information in the Target secret and the Target
secret again boxes.
Enter information in the CHAP secret and the CHAP secret
again boxes.
When you click Logon, the message,
"CHAP secret unmatch. Please enter
the CHAP secret again." is displayed.
The information entered in the CHAP secret does not match
with that of the CHAP secret again.
When you click Logon, the message,
"Logon Failed.(Error code." is
displayed.
An error occurred in logging on to the target.
Re-enter information in the CHAP secret and the CHAP
secret again boxes.
For details, see Section 9.4.3: “iSCSI Setup Tool Error
Codes”.
235
User Guide
Troubleshooting
9.4.2 iSCSI Setup Tool (Linux) Errors
Problem
Cause and Solution
The message, "File not found." is
displayed.
A file that is specified as a parameter file does not exist.
The message, "iSCSI Initiator is not
installed." is displayed.
iSCSI Initiator is not installed.
The message, "The parameter is
invalid." is displayed.
The format of IP addresses of host connection ports
specified in the parameter file is invalid.
Specify the file name correctly.
Install iSCSI Initiator, start the service, and then re-start
iSCSI Setup Tool.
Modify the parameter file and re-start the iSCSI Setup Tool.
The message, "No parameter is set."
is displayed.
Valid parameters are not entered in the parameter file.
The message, "Please enter serial
number." is displayed.
A serial number is not entered in the parameter file.
The message, "Please enter target IP
address." is displayed.
The IP addresses of host connection ports are not specified
in the parameter file.
Modify the parameter file and re-start iSCSI Setup Tool.
Modify the parameter file and re-start iSCSI Setup Tool.
Modify the parameter file and re-start iSCSI Setup Tool.
The message, "Please enter the
target CHAP secret." is displayed.
The target CHAP secret is specified but no CHAP initiator
secret is specified in the parameter file.
Modify the parameter file and re-start iSCSI Setup Tool.
The message, "The tool has already
been started." is displayed.
The iSCSI Setup Tool is already is up and running.
The message, "Invalid host name." is
displayed.
A character other than alphanumeric characters or hyphen
(-) is used for a server host name.
Terminate the running iSCSI Setup Tool, and then restart it.
Change the host name using only alphanumeric characters
or hyphen (-) based on the restrictions of creating target.
After changing the host name, restart the iSCSI Setup Tool.
The message, "Failed to collect the
serial numbers. Error code:xxxx" is
displayed.
An error occurred in retrieving the serial number.
The message, "No management port
of the disk array is not set." is
displayed.
The management port settings are not configured to the
disk array.
The message, "Host connection ports
of the disk array are not set." is
displayed.
The host post connection settings are not configured.
For details, see Section 9.4.3: “iSCSI Setup Tool Error
Codes”.
Set the management port and start the iSCSI Setup Tool
again.
See Section 6.2.1: “Initialization Wizard” to perform the
initialization to configure the host connection port settings.
Then, run the iSCSI Setup Tool again.
236
User Guide
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause and Solution
The message, "The target has
already been assigned to the
initiator." is displayed.
The target which is assigned to initiators already exists.
To register the initiator again, delete the LD Set to which the
initiator was added by using the LD Set management of the
Storage Manager client, and then run the iSCSI Setup Tool
again.
The message, "Failed to collect the
host port information. Error
code:xxxx" is displayed.
An error occurs in a process of retrieving the disk array
information.
The message, "Failed to log on to the
target. Error code:xxxx" is displayed.
An error occurred in logging on to the target.
For details, see Section 9.4.3: “iSCSI Setup Tool Error
Codes”.
For details, see Section 9.4.3: “iSCSI Setup Tool Error
Codes”.
237
User Guide
Troubleshooting
9.4.3 iSCSI Setup Tool Error Codes
iSCSI Setup Tool reports how commands have run and error messages to the following log file.
Windows
%iSMvol%\etc\trace\iSMiSCSISetup.log
Linux
/opt/iSMvol/etc/trace/iSMiSCSISetup.log
1. Error in log file output
[Format]
The error occurred when the log file was output.(Error code:xxxx)
The error is reported by retrieving the error code at the time of executing Windows API function
through the GetLastError function.
2. Errors in collecting the serial number.
[Formats]
Windows
Failed to collect the serial number.(Error code:xxxx)
Linux
Failed to collect the serial numbers. Error code:xxxx
Error Codes
Cause
108
The IP address you have specified is used by another network
equipment.
109
Target resource does not exist.
110
The disk array you have specified is being used by another tool.
111
There are multiple disk arrays with the same serial number.
112
Disk array could not be found.
201
System call failed.
202
Configuring IP address failed.
203
An internal error occurred.
3. Errors in collecting disk array information and logon.
[Formats]
Windows
Failed to collect the disk array information.(Error code:xxxx)
Logon Failed.(Error code:xxxx)
Linux
Failed to collect the host port information. Error code:xxxx
Failed to log on to the target. Error code:xxxx
238
User Guide
Troubleshooting
a. Errors in accessing the disk array
Error Codes
Cause
iSM31001
A command is running.
iSM31002
An unknown error occurred.
iSM31003
Invalid option value.
iSM31004
System call failed.
iSM31005
Connection to Storage Manager failed.
iSM31006
Connection to disk array failed.
iSM31007
Invalid host is specified.
iSM31008
Starting configuration settings failed.
iSM31009
The maximum number of connection.
iSM31010
Storage Manager server version does not match.
iSM31011
File open error.
iSM31012
File load error.
iSM31013
File write error.
iSM31014
File close error.
iSM31015
The disk array is being configured for settings.
iSM31016
Invalid file format.
iSM31017
Invalid command name.
iSM31018
Invalid sub-command name.
iSM31019
Invalid character sting is specified.
iSM31020
Finishing settings of configuration failed.
iSM31021
Closing the socket failed.
iSM31022
The specified OS is not supported.
iSM31023
Shortage of required options.
iSM31024
Restriction on the logical disk number (LDN) specified in the
system area.
iSM31025
The maximum number of options have been exceeded.
iSM31026
Duplicated option.
iSM31027
An invalid related option has been specified.
iSM31028
Invalid option name.
iSM31029
Configuration settings are not started.
iSM31031
Unlocking licenses are not done.
iSM31044
The disk array does not support creation of LD set.
iSM31056
Upper limit of LD set creation.
iSM31057
The specified LD set name is invalid.
iSM31058
The specified LD set is not found.
239
User Guide
Troubleshooting
Error Codes
Cause
iSM31059
The specified LD set exists.
iSM31060
The specified platform is not supported.
iSM31061
Operation on invalid partition.
iSM31098
Partition status has been updated.
iSM31108
The specified LD set is locked.
iSM31147
The specified platform is not supported.
iSM31150
The specified initiator set is set to another LD set.
iSM31151
The specified LD set is being used.
iSM31152
Upper limit of initiator addition.
iSM31174
Exception occurred during transmission.
iSM31175
Timeout occurred with connection to Storage Manager.
iSM31208
Specified LD set is designated for FC.
iSM31212
The platform of LD set does not match that of initiator.
b. Other errors
Error Codes
Cause
-
An error occurred in Iscsicli or iscsiadm command.
(Refer to the log file for the detail on the error.
Time Out
Timeout occurred while running a command.
Service Error
An error occurred during service startup.
(Refer to the log file for the detail on the error.)
SSH Error
Error occurred during the process of SSH.
(Refer to the log file for the detail on the error.)
240
User Guide
Troubleshooting
9.5 StoreWay Multipath (Windows) Errors
Problem
Cause and Solution
The SPS command /lun, -getlun
failed.
When no paths are recognized by SPS, the following error
may occur when the SPS command is executed.
> spsadmin /lun
"Operation failed."
When this error occurs, check:
 Whether the installed HBA driver is appropriate and it is
installed correctly. Refer to the installation manual of the
HBA driver, and reinstall a HBA driver supported by the
OS and the servers it will be installed.
 Whether settings of the disk array unit, including the
access control and the cross call, and the FC switch
settings are configured correctly.
If the problem persists even after checking and performing
above mentioned, please contact the Support Service.
Only one path is detected after the
SPS command /lun, -getlun is run.
Check the following:
The number of devices shown under
the disk drive of the device manager
is smaller than expected.
When this error occurs, check:
 Whether the FC cables are connected correctly. Connect
the FC cables again.
 Whether the installed HBA driver is appropriate and it is
installed correctly. Refer to the installation manual of the
HBA driver, and reinstall a HBA driver supported by the
OS and the servers it will be installed.
 Whether settings of the disk array unit, including the
access control and the cross call, and the FC switch
settings are configured correctly.
If the problem persists even after checking and performing
above mentioned, please contact the Support Service.
241
User Guide
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause and Solution
Event ID280 (spsdsm) is generated
in the system event log.
Check if the configuration of connections between the
servers and the disk array unit has been changed due to an
event such as replacement of an HBA or reconnection of an
FC cable. Delete the old configuration information by
running spsadmin/deletemissing.
Event ID10 (WinMgmt/WMI) is
generated in the application event
log.
This event is generated due to the specification of the SPS,
and is not indication of abnormality. This does not affect the
operation of the system.
Source: WinMgmt (Case of Windows Server 2003)
WMI (Case of Windows Server 2008)
EventID: 10
Type: Error
Description:
Event filter with query "select * from
SPN_EVENTENTRY" could not be (re)activated in
namespace "//./root/WMI" because of error 0x80041010.
Events may not be delivered through this filter until the
problem is corrected.
Or,
Event filter with query "select * from
NEC_MAM_EVENTENTRY" could not be (re)activated in
namespace "//./root/WMI" because of error 0x80041010.
Events may not be delivered through this filter until the
problem is corrected.
242
User Guide
Troubleshooting
9.6 StoreWay Multipath (Linux) Errors
Problem
Cause and Solution
After SPS is installed and the OS is
restarted, the SPS device (/dev/ddX)
is not created.
1. Check that you are using supported HBAs.
2. Check the serial number of the disk array unit is
configured correctly.
3. Check the disk array unit is recognized by the OS.
Refer to the file "/proc/scsi/scsi" and check if "Vendor:
BULL" and "Model: DISK ARRAY" are shown. If the disk
array unit is not recognized, they are not shown in the
file. When they are not shown, check the FC cables are
connected correctly.
4. Check SPS has been installed successfully.
Check the kernel version by running the command
"uname -r" to ensure that the SPS that works with the
supported kernel version is installed.
If the problem persists even after checking and performing
above mentioned, please contact the Support Service.
A configuration file of the SPS was
created successfully but an error
occurred when I/O was performed
through the SPS device (/dev/ddX).
Check if "Not Ready" is generated in the system log.
If "Not Ready" is generated, check the LUN state by using
Storage Manger because the LUN of the disk array unit may
be in "Not Ready" state.
The LUN state may have been changed by a command
from ControlCommandSet (such as ReplicationControl,
SnapControl). Clear "Not Ready" state according to the
device you are using.
If the problem persists even after checking and performing
above mentioned, please contact the Support Service.
243
User Guide
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause and Solution
When the OS is started, the message
"Path Not Found" is displayed and
accessing the SPS device fails.
Check the disk array unit is recognized by the OS.
Refer to the file "/proc/scsi/scsi" and check if "Vendor:
BULL" and "Model: DISK ARRAY" are shown. If the disk
array unit is not recognized, they are not shown. When they
are not shown, check the FC cables are connected
correctly.
The SPS recognizes the path information at its first startup,
and creates and retains the information in a status setting
file. If correct connection to the disk array unit fails to be
configured in the first OS startup after installation of SPS, it
can cause incorrect path information to be recorded. In this
case, delete the setting file recorded in the SPS, and then
restart the OS.
If the problem persists even after checking and performing
above mentioned, please contact the Support Service.
SPS cannot be started when a
certain RPM is updated.
Updating initscripts or iscsi-initiator-utils in a RHEL
environment may disable the settings of automatic startup
for SPS, and SPS may not be started automatically when
the OS is started.
Check /etc/rc.d/rc.sysinit to see the settings of automatic
startup for SPS are configured. Run the following command
and if there is no output, it indicates the settings of
automatic startup for SPS are not configured.
# grep mkdd /etc/rc.d/rc.sysinit
If the settings of automatic startup for SPS have not been
configured, configure them again and restart the OS. See
the followings for setting automatic startup for SPS.
# cd /etc/rc.d
<Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 (FC connection)>
# patch -b -p0 <
/opt/nec/sps/patch/rc.sysinit.rhel5.diff
<Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 (iSCSI connection)>
# patch -b -p0 <
/opt/nec/sps/patch/iscsi.rhel5.diff
When you run the patch command but an error message is
shown, it indicates the patch file is not applied correctly. In
this case, add the line with "+" shown on the first row of the
patch file to /etc/rc.d/rc.sysinit or /etc/rc.d/init.d/iscsi.
If the problem persists even after checking and performing
above mentioned, please contact the Support Service.
244
User Guide
Troubleshooting
9.7 Changing Network Settings for Monitoring Disk Arrays from Storage
Manager
If a disk array cannot be monitored correctly from Storage Manager due to faults occurring in
performing initialization or erroneous settings, network settings must be changed.
Change disk array network settings using any of the following two procedures.
Whether the disk array or management server must be changed is noted in the summary of each
setting. Make changes after taking into account their effect on business.
1. Changing Network Setting from Storage Manager
If the disk array is monitored from Storage Manager, the disk array unit network settings can be
changed from Storage Manager.
Make changes using Configuration - Disk Array - Management Port Settings from the menu.
For details, refer to the Storage Manager Configuration Setting Tool User's Manual (GUI) for the
Optima X600 Series.
2. Changing Network Setting from Network Setting Tool
The disk array unit network settings can be changed from Network Setting Tool. For details, see
Section 4.3.2: “Configuring IP Addresses by Using Network Setting Tool”.
245
User Guide
Troubleshooting
9.8 Troubleshooting at Installation
If the iSCSI port of the disk array cannot be set or the disk cannot be recognized by the host when
installing the disk array, check the disk array settings following the procedure described below.
9.8.1 The IP Address of the iSCSI Port cannot be set on the Storage Manager
Initialization Wizard.
The same IP address cannot be set to multiple iSCSI ports in a disk array. If an IP address conflict
occurred when setting an IP address, specify a unique IP address to each iSCSI port.
9.8.2 The logical disks of the disk array cannot be recognized by the host, or an error
message is displayed
The following figure shows the confirmation procedure. First, execute ping to the iSCSI port of the disk
array from the iSCSI port of the host (the appropriate NIC of software initiator), and check whether ping
is successfully sent. For details about how to send ping, refer to the PING communication method of
each OS.
246
User Guide
Troubleshooting
1. Checking the iSCSI port settings
If the disk array did not correspond to ping, check (1)-1 and (1)-2. After checking them, go to the
steps described below:


When using iSNS: (2) Checking iSNS
When not using iSNS: (3) Checking the LD Set settings of the disk array
1-1. Checking linkup
Check the port to which the disk array and connected devices such as a host and switch are
connected is correctly linkup.
Check method
The Link LED of the iSCSI port of the disk array is lit, the port is linkup. If the port is not linkup,
check which of the following (a to c) is the LED status of the port.
When the Ready LED of the controller is not blinking, the disk array is not online. Check
the following when the disk array is online.
a. The Link LED and Active LED blink twice every two seconds
The iSCSI settings such as an IP address and subnet mask of the port have not been set, or
they are invalid. Specify the iSCSI settings again by using the Storage Manager initialization
wizard. It is thought that Node Name (WWnn) of the disk array has not been set. If the LEDs are
still blinking, after the iSCSI settings of the port have been correctly specified, check the Node
Name of the disk array is correctly set.
b. The Link LED and Active LED blink once every two seconds
The port is offline. Check whether the disk array is being shut down.
c. The Link LED and Active LED are not lit
In the case of 10Gbps iSCSI, check whether the connected devices such as a host and
switches support 10Gbps, or whether they are normally running.
In the case of 1Gbps iSCSI, the LEDs are not linkup when the link speed is not 1Gbps. Check
whether the transfer rate of the connected devices such as a host and switches is 1Gbps, or
whether they are normally running.
If the connected devices are normally running, check the cable connection.
1-2. Checking the connection and settings
247
User Guide
Troubleshooting
a. Checking the cable connection
Check whether the cable connection between the host and disk array, including switches is
correct.
b. Checking the IP address and other settings of the connected devices
Check the IP address and subnet mask settings of the connected devices including the host.
For the checking method, refer to the manual of the host.
c. Checking the connection devices such as switches
When the host and disk array are connected via a switch, check the switch settings. For the
checking method, refer to the manual of the switch.
2. Checking iSNS
When iSNS is used and the disk array and host information cannot be applied to the iSNS server,
check the following. When iSNS is not used, or the problem has been corrected, go to 3. “Checking
the LD Set settings of the disk array”.
Check items


Check whether the iSNS server-related connection between the host and disk array is correct.
Check whether the iSNS server-related IP addresses of the host and disk array are correct, and
whether the TCP port number is correct.
For how to change the iSNS settings of the disk array, refer to the manual of Storage Manager.
Be sure to specify the number of the following registered ports for the port number.

iSCSI port: 3260 (The iSCSI port number of the Optima3600 series disk array is
defined to this number.)
 iSNS port: 3205 (Specify the iSNS port number from Storage Manager.)
3. Checking the LD Set settings of the disk array
Check the Access Control and CHAP authentication settings of the disk array. After checking and
changing the settings, go to 4. “Checking the host settings”.
LD Set log collection method
After collecting the LD Set information by using Storage Manager, check the settings below. For
how to collect the LD Set information, refer to the manual of Storage Manager.
(3)-1 Checking the settings related to Access Control
a. Check that the initiator name set to the LD Set is the same as that of the host.
b. Check that the IP address of the iSCSI port of the disk array, which has been set to the LD Set,
is correct.
c. Check that the logical disks assigned to the host as an LD Set is correct.
(3)-2 Checking the CHAP authentication settings
Check whether CHAP is enabled or disabled by referring to the CHAP authentication /
bidirectional CHAP authentication settings of the initiator (host) and Storage Manager.
For how to change the settings of Storage Manager, refer to the manual of Storage Manager.
248
User Guide
Troubleshooting
4. Checking the host settings
Check the following iSCSI settings of the host.
(4)-1 Checking the iSCSI parameter settings of the host
Check that the iSCSI settings of the host, including the initiator name, CHAP, and target portal,
are correct.
If the port number can be selected for the target specification settings of iSCSI initiator,
including an IP address and subnet mask, use the default port number (3260).
(4)-2 Checking the multi-session settings of the host
Check that the login setting of the host is not set to multi-session. For how to check the login
setting, refer to the manual of the host (software initiator).
Multi-session
If logging in to the same IP address (iSCSI port) of the disk array twice from the hosts with the
same name, the first login connection is disconnected.
Example: In the case of iSCSI Initiator on Windows Server 2003, if the same target is specified
to Persistent Targets twice or more
If the Automatically restore this connection when the system boots check box is selected at
login, the target is registered to the Persistent Targets tab of the Microsoft iSCSI Initiator dialog
box.
If the same target logs in to the disk array twice or more by specifying the same IP address, the
duplicated list is set to Persistent Targets, and the system enters a multi-session. If a duplicated
Target-IPaddress pair exists in Persistent Targets, delete the duplicated pair.
For details, refer to the manual of Microsoft iSCSI Initiator.
(4)-3 Checking whether the host logged in target on the disk array
Check whether the host is logging in the target on the disk array. For how to check, refer to the
manual of the host (software initiator). If the host is not logging in the target, check whether the
host is set to log in the target on the disk array.
For iSCSI Initiator software, it is possible to specify whether to automatically reconnect to the
host after rebooting the host. If the logical disk cannot recognized after rebooting the host,
check whether the automatic recognition settings are appropriate.
5. When the error cause cannot be identified
Prepare the items described in Section 9.10.2: “Before You Call”, and then contact Bull SAS sales,
the sales agent from whom you purchased the disk array unit, or your maintenance service agent.
249
User Guide
Troubleshooting
9.9 SAS Connection Errors
When the management of the disk is started at SAS connection, the following error is logged by event
log.
This is caused by the fact that HBA does not have pass information.
There is not the problem in operation.
Source: VDS Basic Provider
EventID: 1
Type: Error
Description: Unexpected error occurred. Error Cord: 490@01010004
250
User Guide
Troubleshooting
9.10 User Support
9.10.1 Unit Life Span and Maintenance Period
The unit life span and maintenance periods after production ends for the disk array unit are as follows.
Parts used in the disk array unit include parts that must be replaced due to their life spans (such as
cooling fans, batteries, and disk drives).
Since life spans may be shorter than five years depending on the environment in which the disk array
unit is used, it is recommended that parts be replaced regularly. Contact your maintenance service
agent regarding replacements and life spans.
 Unit life span: 5 years
 Maintenance period: 5 years after production ends
Note that repair may not be possible in the cases below. Moreover, a fee may be charged even if within
the warranty period.
 Stained goods, dropped goods, goods damaged by mishandling
 Goods damaged by mishandling in storage or shipping
 Items altered by the user
 Items whose life spans are over
 Goods damaged by earthquake, lightning, fire, or other natural disaster, and goods damaged due to
an accident or other external cause
Life Spans of Parts
 Fan (power supply): 50,000 hours
 Disk drive: 5 years
Consumables
 Battery
The battery life span becomes shorter when it is used in high temperatures environments.
The life span is about 5 years when used under an ambient temperature of 25 degree
celsius (77°F), but will be reduced to approximately half (about 2.5 years) at an ambient
temperature of 35 degree celsius (95°F). In addition, as backup frequency increases, the
battery life span becomes shorter. The life span above is calculated considering accidental
power disconnection such as power outage.
9.10.2 Before You Call
Before you call to clarify your queries or consult on a failure or abnormality of a disk array unit, the
following items should be available.
 The warranty and this user guide.
 Conditions of the fault or abnormality, notes on content of questions.
 Notes on the unit configuration and software used on it.
(Use the troubleshooting information sheet on the following page and the checksheet found in
Appendix J: "LED Inspection Checksheet")
251
User Guide
Troubleshooting
 Notes on the configuration of the connection of the host unit to the disk array unit and the
configuration of peripheral equipment connected to the host unit.
 Manuals for the host unit and peripheral equipment connected to the host unit and manuals of
software used.
9.10.3 Contacts for questions and consultation
For questions and consultation about the disk array unit, contact Bull sales, the sales agent from whom
you purchased it, or your maintenance service agent.
252
Appendix A Specifications
The specifications of the disk array are shown below.
Table A-1: Specifications - Disk Array
StoreWay Optima3600
Host interface
(A) Fibre channel (FC-AL / Fabric)
 Maximum transfer rate: 8 Gbps
(B) iSCSI interface
 Maximum transfer rate: 1 Gbps
 Maximum transfer rate: 10 Gbps (Fibre)
(C) SAS interface
 Maximum transfer rate: 6 Gbps
HPEs per unit
2 (initial)
4 (when HPE added)
(A) 4
Number of host ports per CONT
(B) 2
(C) 2
Cache memory capacity per unit
12 GB, 24 GB, or 48 GB
Backup time for cache memory
Unlimited
DEs per unit
3.5-inch DE: Max. 32 (max. 8 per port)
2.5-inch DE: Max. 16 (max. 4 per port)
Number of disk drives
3 to 384 (max. 96 per port)
Disk drive
3.5-inch SAS (15Krpm): 300 GB, 450 GB, 600 GB
(standard), 600 GB (encryption)
3.5-inch NL-SAS (7.2Krpm): 1 TB, 2 TB, 3TB
3.5-inch SSD: 100 GB
2.5-inch SAS (10Krpm): 300 GB, 450 GB, 600 GB
(standard), 600 GB (encryption), 900 GB
2.5-inch NL-SAS (7.2Krpm): 1 TB
2.5-inch SSD: 100 GB 400 GB
Disk interface
SAS: Maximum transfer rate: 6 Gbps
RAID type
RAID-10, 50, 60, TM
253
User Guide
Specifications of the RAID configurations are shown below.
Table A-2: Specifications - RAID Configurations
RAID type
RAID components
Number of disk drives
Storage efficiency
RAID-10
(1D+1D)× n
2 or more
50%
RAID-50
(2D+P)× n
3 or more
66%
(4D+P)× n
5 or more
80%
(8D+P)× n
9 or more
88%
(4D+PQ)× n
6 or more
66%
(8D+PQ)× n
10 or more
80%
1D+1D+1D
3
33%
RAID-60
RAID-TM
 It is recommended that you use disk drives of the same capacity and rotational frequency for
RAID systems.
 D refers to data disk; P and Q refer to parity disks.
 n is an integer greater than 1.
254
Appendix B How to Set/Check Application Server
(Windows) (FC)
This appendix provides the steps you should follow while setting or checking application server in the Windows
environment, when the disk array is configured for the FC connection.
B.1 Installing Storage Manager Agent Utility
This section describes how to install Storage Manager Agent Utility.
B.1.1 Before Installation
Note the followings before installing the Storage Manager Agent Utility. The following functions
become available by installing the Storage Manager Agent Utility.
 iSM volume list command.
 Host agent (Host information collection command and host agent service) (*1)
 iSCSI Setup Tool (*2)
 Storage Manager Host Register Agent (*3)
 *1 Available in Windows Server 2003 SP 1 or later environments.
 *2 Available in Windows Server 2008 or later environments.
 *3 Available in Windows Server 2003 or later environments.
Table B-1 shows the supported operating environment
255
Appendix
User Guide
.
Table B-1: Operating Environment (Windows)
Operating systems
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition (SP0 to SP2) (*1)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard Edition (SP0, SP2)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 Edition (SP0, SP2)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition (SP0, SP2)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition (SP0 to SP2) (*1)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise Edition (SP0, SP2)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition (SP0, SP2)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition (SP0, SP2)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition for Itanium-based
Systems
(SP0 to SP2) (*1) (*5)
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard (SP0, SP2) (*2) (*3) (*4)
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard (SP0, SP1) (*2) (*4)
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise (SP0, SP2) (*2) (*3) (*4)
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard (SP0, SP1) (*2) (*4)
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 for Itanium-based Systems (SP0, SP2) (*5)
(*1) To use the host information collection function included in Storage
Manager Agent Utility, SP1 or SP2 must be applied on this OS.
(*2) The product without Hyper-V function is also supported.
(*3) The Server Core install option is not supported.
(*4) The iSCSI Setup Tool (sharing function) can be used on the Optima X600
series disk arrays. This tool supports Windows Server 2008 or later. The
32-bit version of Java Runtime Environment (JRE) must be installed to use
this function.
(*5) The Optima X600 series does not support Microsoft Windows Server
2003, Enterprise Edition for Itanium-based Systems, and Microsoft Windows
Server 2008 for Itanium-based Systems.
256
User Guide
Table B-1: Operating Environment (Windows)
Memory
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition
OS required memory + 10 MB or more
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard Edition
OS required memory + 10 MB or more
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 Edition
OS required memory + 12 MB or more
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition
OS required memory + 12 MB or more
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition
OS required memory + 10 MB or more
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise Edition
OS required memory + 10 MB or more
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition
OS required memory + 12 MB or more
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition
OS required memory + 12 MB or more
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition for Itanium-based
Systems
OS required memory + 37 MB or more
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard
OS required memory + 10 MB or more
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise
OS required memory + 10 MB or more
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 for Itanium-based Systems
OS required memory + 37 MB or more
Disk capacity
20 MB or more
* Above are the supported environments for this version at the point of the initial shipment of this
product.
257
Appendix
User Guide
B.1.2 Installation
Use Storage Manager Setup to install the Storage Manager Agent Utility.
Storage Manager Setup starts automatically when the Storage Manager Express Setup and Utility
DVD-ROM is set and then you can perform installation as prompted.
The procedure for starting the Storage Manager Setup is:
1. Logon as administrator.
2. Set the DVD-ROM of Storage Manager in an application server.
3. The Storage Manager Setup starts automatically. Perform the installation as prompted.
The Storage Manager Setup may not start automatically depending on your system configuration, in
which case, start the following program contained in the DVD-ROM:
\INSTALL\WINDOWS\ISMSETUP.EXE
After the Storage Manager Agent Utility is installed, the system needs to be
restarted to start the Storage Manager host agent service.
In the case of the environment that a system cannot be restarted, after Storage Manager Agent Utility
is installed, put the following operation into effect.
 Start the Services of the Windows Administrative Tools in Control Panel and start the following
services.
 Storage Manager Host Agent
 Storage Host Register Agent
When there are a task scheduler, a job scheduling and a command prompt of Windows, which are
already started, restart them.
258
User Guide
B.2 Collecting/Registering Host Information on Application Server
B.2.1 Collecting Host Information by Using File Output
To collect host information by using file output, follow the procedure below.
1. Run host information collection command (iSMcc_hostinfo)
Run the host information collection command (iSMcc_hostinfo) from the command prompt. For
the -export option, specify a file (host information file) to which host information will be reported.
Run the host information collection command (iSMcc_hostinfo) as a user privileged as
Administrator.
D:\> iSMcc_hostinfo -export \ServerName
iSMcc_hostinfo: Info:
iSM11700: Please wait a minute.
iSMcc_hostinfo: Info:
iSM11770: Host Information was exported
successfully. (code=
aaaa-bbbb-bbbb-bbbb)
iSMcc_hostinfo: Info:
iSM11100: Command has completed
successfully.
2. Confirm the result of running the command
After running the host information collection command (iSMcc_hostinfo), confirm that the
message No. iSM11770 is reported and the host information is successfully collected. "aaaa" in the
message example above is replaced with a process number and "bbbb" with an internal code for
maintenance in the actual message.
3. Transferring the host information file
Transfer the host information file reported by using the host information collection command
(iSMcc_hostinfo) to a client by using file transfer, USB memory, or other methods.
To register host information files transferred to clients, see Section B.2.2: “Registering Host
Information by Using File Output”.
259
Appendix
User Guide
B.2.2 Registering Host Information by Using File Output
To register host information by using file output, follow the procedure below.
1. Report a host information file.
See Section B.2.1: “Collecting Host Information by Using File Output” to report a host information
file.
2. Transfer the host information file to a client.
Use file transfer, USB memory or other methods to transfer the host information file to a client.
3. Register the host information by using Storage Manager.
On the left pane on the Storage Manager window, click Configuration, Host and Host Information
Collection to open the Host Information Registration window.
Figure B-1: Getting Started - Host Information Collection
4. Select host information setting method.
260
User Guide
Figure B-2: Host Information Collection - Setting Method
Select the Update with host information file. (Windows, Linux or Hyper-V) option and click
Next.
5. Specify the host information file.
261
Appendix
User Guide
Figure B-3: Host Information Collection - Registration
a. Click Show collected information to specify the file in which host information is recorded and
click Add.
b. Confirm that all the host information is retrieved and click Next.
This displays the Host information collection completion window.
262
User Guide
6. Host information setting completion window
Figure B-4: Host Information Collection - Completion
The result of setting host information is displayed. Click Finish to close the page.
263
Appendix
User Guide
B.3 Checking Connection from Application Server
This section describes how to check connection under a Windows environment and check the
Multipath settings and status.
B.3.1 Check connection under a Windows environment
After confirming that the application server and disk array unit are connected through an FC cable,
restart the server and perform the following checks.
a. To start, select Administrative Tools > Computer Management > Device Manager.
b. Click Disk drives and check the number of logical disks.
If nothing is displayed, the OS was unable to recognize logical disks in the disk
array assigned to a server. Check the connection between the server and disk array
unit, the Access Control settings, host bus adapter driver settings, etc.
Display example: When four logical disks are assigned to a server.
264
User Guide
Figure B-5: Computer Management - Device Manager
c. Open Disk Management and check the number of logical disks assigned to a server.
265
Appendix
User Guide
Check the
number of
disks indicated
this icons.
Figure B-6: Computer Management - Disk Management
266
User Guide
B.3.2 Check the Multipath Settings and Status
When Multipath is not used, it is not necessary to perform this step.
After checking the FC cable connection between the application server and disk array unit, restart the
server and run the following command from the command prompt.

For details, refer to the StoreWay Multipath User's Guide (Windows Version).
Check Multipath status
Run the following command from the command prompt.
spsadmin /lun
Check the message shown after the command is executed, and then check the number of logical disks
assigned to the server, the number of access paths per logical disk, and each path status.
Display example: When two logical disks are assigned to a server, with two access paths per logical
disk.
C:\>spsadmin /lun
+++ LogicalUnit #0 +++
SerialNumber="0000000995000001", LDNumber=0x00000
LoadBalance=Least Size
0: ScsiAddress=2:0:0:0, Priority=1, Status=Active
1: ScsiAddress=3:0:0:0, Priority=2, Status=Standby
+++ LogicalUnit #1 +++
SerialNumber="0000000995000001", LDNumber=0x00001
LoadBalance=Least Size
0: ScsiAddress=2:0:0:1, Priority=1, Status=Active
1: ScsiAddress=3:0:0:1, Priority=2, Status=Standby
If nothing is displayed, none of the access paths recognized the logical disks of the disk
array unit assigned to the application server. Check the connection between the
application server and the disk array unit, the Access Control settings, host bus adapter
driver settings, and other settings.
267
Appendix
User Guide
268
Appendix C How to Set/Check Application Server
(Windows) (iSCSI)
C.1 Initializing Application Server
Perform the following steps to initialize the application server in Windows environments.
Prepare for installation.
For details, refer to Section C.1.1: Preparation.
Install Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator.
For details, refer to Section C.1.2: Installing iSCSI
Software Initiator.
If Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator has already
been installed, this step is not necessary.
Install Multipath.
For details, refer to Section C.1.3: Installing
StoreWay Multipath.
When Multipath will not be used, this step is not
necessary.
This describes how to set up Microsoft iSCSI
Software Initiator.
For details, refer to Section C.1.4: Setting up iSCSI
Software Initiator.
269
User Guide
C.1.1 Preparation
Perform the following steps to prepare for installation of application server in Windows environment:
1. Provide IP addresses for an application server
Prepare IP addresses to be assigned to the application server as many as the NIC (1000BASE-T or
10GBASE-SR) ports. In addition, prepare the subnet mask and gateway addresses by asking the
network administrator.
2. Attach NIC (1000BASE-T or 10GBASE-SR)
Attach the NIC to the application server as described in the manuals provided with the NIC and
application server.
If the NIC has already been attached to the application server, this step is not
necessary.
3. Install the NIC (1000BASE-T or 10GBASE-SR) driver
Install and set up the driver according to the setup procedure in the manual provided with the NIC
equipped in the server, or by referencing information provided on the Web, etc.
If the driver has already been installed and set up for the NIC equipped in the
application server, this step is not necessary.
4. Specify the network settings
Select Start > Control Panel > Network Connection, and then open Local Area Connection
Properties to specify the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
5. Connect to the disk array unit
Use a 10-Gbps or 1-Gbps cable to connect the application server to the host port (HP connector) of
the disk array unit.

Unit equipped with NF53x1-xF21xx (unit with 10Gbps iSCSI 2port controllers)
10-Gbps cable
Connector shape: LC connector
NF9320-SJxx (FC cable) can be used.

Unit equipped with NF53x1-xF11xx (unit with 1Gbps iSCSI 2port controllers)
1-Gbps cable
Connector shape: RJ-45 connector
 CAT6 LAN cable is recommended.
 Either straight cable or crossover cable can be used.
270
User Guide
For a sample connection configuration, see Appendix L: "iSCSI Connection
Configuration-Examples".
The following shows the positions of the host ports.
Figure C-1: Unit with NF53x1-xFxx (10Gbps iSCSI 2port Controllers)
Figure C-2: Unit with NF53x1-xFxx (1Gbps iSCSI 2port Controllers)
The following shows an example of a 10-Gbps iSCSI connection (redundant path configuration in
combination with Multipath).
To implement the following recommended example, two NICs must be installed in the application
server and two 10-Gbps cables are needed to connect the disk array unit and NICs.
Use a 10-Gbps cable to connect the NIC to the host port (HP connector) of the disk array unit. (The
10-Gbps cable has the same connector shape on both ends.)
271
User Guide
Figure C-3: Configuration Example
272
User Guide
C.1.2 Installing iSCSI Software Initiator
Perform the following steps to install iSCSI Software Initiator in Windows Server 2008 or Windows
Server 2003 environments:
Windows Server 2008
Windows Server 2008 have the iSCSI Software Initiator already installed, so there are no installation
steps. Select Start > Administrative Tools, and then start iSCSI Initiator.
The following dialog boxes are displayed only during initial startup. After the service is started, if there
are no problems with the firewall settings, click the Yes button in each screen.
Figure C-4: Microsoft iSCSI (1) Dialog Box
Figure C-5: Microsoft iSCSI (2) Screen
Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2003 R2
Perform the following steps to install the initiator in Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2003 R2
environment:
1. Download the Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator from the Microsoft website
(http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/).
2. The following screen is displayed when installation of the Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator begins.
Click the Next button.
273
User Guide
Figure C-6: Software Update Installation Wizard Screen (1)
3. After changing the settings as follows, click the Next button.

Select the Initiator Service option.

Select the Software Initiator option.

Deselect the Microsoft MPIO Multipathing Support for iSCSI option.
When Multipath is being used, the MPIO function cannot be used.
274
User Guide
Figure C-7: Software Update Installation Wizard Screen (2)
4. If you agree to the terms of the license agreement, select I Agree, and then click the Next button.
275
User Guide
Figure C-8: Software Update Installation Wizard Screen (3)
5. The following dialog box appears next. No more user input is needed until installation is completed.
276
User Guide
Figure C-9: Software Update Installation Wizard Screen (4)
6. Click the Finish button to restart the server.
277
User Guide
Figure C-10: Software Update Installation Wizard Screen (5)
7. After the server is restarted, the Microsoft iSCSI Initiator icon appears on the desktop.
Figure C-11: Application Server Desktop Screen
C.1.3 Installing StoreWay Multipath
See Section I.1: For Windows Application Server for installation procedure.
This operation is not necessary if you do not install StoreWay Multipath.
When using Multipath MPIO function of the iSCSI Software Initiator cannot
be used. If the iSCSI Software Initiator has already been installed and MPIO
function is set to enabled, you must uninstall the iSCSI Software Initiator.
Then reinstall the iSCSI Software Initiator with the setting not using MPIO
function.
278
User Guide
C.1.4 Setting up iSCSI Software Initiator
Settings for the Windows Server 2008 environment are described below.
1. Select the General tab in the iSCSI Initiator Properties screen to check the iqn (iSCSI Qualified
Name) shown as the Initiator name.
Figure C-12: iSCSI Initiator Properties (General Tab) Screen
 Click the Change button to change the iqn.
 Click the Secret button when using the mutual CHAP authentication.
 Click the Setup button when using the IPSec tunnel mode function. This is not supported.
 The Secret setting for mutual CHAP authentication must also be set for
the disk array unit. The setting method is described in Section 17.3.21:
iSMcfg setldsetchap of Storage Manager Command Reference.
 Mutual CHAP authentication is also described in Storage Manager
Command Reference as Bidirectional CHAP authentication.
CHAP authentication is also described in Appendix O: "CHAP Authentication".
279
User Guide
2. If mutual CHAP authentication will be used, click the Secret button.If mutual CHAP authentication
will not be used, skip step (3) and move to step (4) below.
Figure C-13: iSCSI Initiator Properties (General Tab) Screen
3. Under CHAP Secret, enter the password assigned to Initiator for use in mutual CHAP
authentication, and then click the OK button.
Figure C-14: CHAP Secret Input Window
280
User Guide
 The CHAP Secret can be specified as any string of 12 to 16
alphanumeric characters as well as !#$%&’*+~/=?{|}_.-. Letters are
case-sensitive. For security, password text strings are indicated as ● or
other symbols.
 Mutual CHAP authentication is also described in Storage Manager
Command Reference as Bidirectional CHAP authentication.
 The CHAP Secret that is set here is a password that a target uses to
authenticate the Initiator. This password is also required for settings on
the disk array side (see Section: 17.3.21 iSMcfg setldsetchap in the
Storage Manager Command Reference), so be sure to write it down so
it is not forgotten.
4. Perform the iSCSI Initiator Properties Discovery tab settings using any of the following options:

Settings when not using iSNS (Internet Storage Name Service) server

Settings when using the iSNS (Internet Storage Name Service) server
Settings when not using iSNS (Internet Storage Name Service) server
Perform the following settings:
281
User Guide
a. Under the Discovery tab in iSCSI Initiator Properties, click the Add Portal button under
Target Portal.
Figure C-15: iSCSI Initiator Properties (Discovery Tab) Screen
b. Enter the IP address of the disk array host port (iSCSI port) under IP address or DNS name.
Make sure the entry is correct, and then click the OK button.
Figure C-16: Add Target Portal Screen
Do not change the Port setting "3260”.
282
User Guide
c. The following pop-up window may appear, but it does not affect operations.
Click the OK button.
Figure C-17: Authentication Error Screen
d. To make the host port (iSCSI port) on the disk array of a redundant configuration, perform steps
(a) to (c) above for each additional host port.
When settings are completed, a screen such as the following is displayed. Click the OK button.
Example: When two Target Portal IP addresses have been registered.
Figure C-18: iSCSI Initiator Properties (Discovery Tab) Screen
283
User Guide
Settings when using iSNS (Internet Storage Name Service) server
 Microsoft iSNS Server must be installed in a Windows server on the
same network as the application server.
 For detailed description of iSNS server, refer to manuals and other
documents provided separately from Microsoft Corporation.
Perform the following settings:
a. Under the Discovery tab in iSCSI Initiator Properties, click the Add button.
Figure C-19: iSCSI Initiator Properties (Discovery Tab) Screen
b. Enter the IP address of the iSNS server under IP address or DNS name of server.
Make sure the entry is correct, and then click the OK button.
Figure C-20: iSNS Server Add Screen
c. Repeat steps (a) and (b) above for each iSNS server IP address to be registered. When settings
are completed, a screen such as the following is displayed. Click the OK button.
Example: When two iSNS server IP addresses are registered.
284
User Guide
Figure C-21: iSCSI Initiator Properties (Discovery Tab) Screen
d. This gets Initiator information from the application server registered to the iSNS server.
Refer to Appendix N: "Retrieve Initiator Information on Application Servers Registered with
iSNS Server".
When using the iSNS server, the Initiator name of the application server must be
directly entered under the Initiator settings in the iSCSI Setup Tool.
285
User Guide
e. Click the OK button.
Figure C-22: iSCSI Initiator Properties (General Tab) Screen
286
User Guide
C.2 iSCSI Setup Tool
Run the iSCSI Setup Tool on application servers to configure the iSCSI settings required for the
application server. Before starting this section, you need to install Storage Manager Agent Utility. For
details on how to install, see Section B.1: Installing Storage Manager Agent Utility.
1. Starting iSCSI Setup Tool
Click Start > Storage Manager Agent Utility > iSCSI Setup Tool to start iSCSI Setup Tool.
2. Selecting the target disk array unit
Select the serial number of the target disk array unit from the Serial number(S) box.
After selecting or entering the serial number, click OK.
3. When collecting the disk array unit information is successfully completed, the serial number,
controllers, IP addresses of the disk array unit and their connection statuses are displayed.
287
User Guide
Figure C-23: iSCSI Setup Tool - Log on to the Target
Select a target IP addresses from the list and configure required settings. You can select multiple
target IP addresses. When you want to select multiple target IP addresses, select the Multi Path
check box.
After the required information is entered, click Logon.
4. When logging on to the target disk array is successfully complete, the message “Logon
Succeeded.” appears. Clicking OK brings you back to the logon page of the target, so click Close to
end iSCSI Setup Tool.
288
User Guide
 iSCSI Setup Tool uses Java. It is necessary to install Java Runtime
Environment (32-bit version) to the operation server.
 The host name should be 15 bytes or less.
 An error may occur and an invalid LD set may be recorded when you
complete logon and retry to logon to a disk array system with the same
serial number. In this case, delete the invalid LD set using Storage
Manager.
 An application server has to be connected to both of the network
connected with a management port of a target disk array and the network
connected with a host connection port.
 When using Storage Manager (Storage Manager Express/Storage
Manager Suite), please use the iSCSI Setup Tool in the state which
doesn't hold a configuration setting screen of Storage Manager.
 Please use the iSCSI Setup Tool in the state in which a LD set with the iqn
of the same application server does not exist in the target disk array.
 After setting an IP address in a host connection port or changing it, the
iSCSI Setup Tool will be sometimes an error. Please re-execute the iSCSI
Setting Tool in that case.
289
User Guide
C.3 Checking Connection from Application Server
Perform the following steps to connect the application server and disk array in Windows environments.
Log on to the target.
For details, refer to Section C.3.1: Logon Steps in
Windows Environments
Confirm that the OS recognizes the logical disk.
For details, refer to Section C.3.2: Confirmation
Steps in Windows Environments.
Check Multipath settings and status.
For details, refer to Section C.3.3: Check the
Multipath Settings and Status.
If Multipath will not be used, this step is not
necessary.
290
User Guide
C.3.1 Logon Steps in Windows Environments
Perform the following steps to logon to the target in the windows environment:
1. Click the Refresh under the Targets tab in iSCSI Initiator Properties. Then, the Initiator name
(iqn) of the disk array unit will be shown under Targets. Select an iqn and click the Log on button.
Figure C-24: iSCSI Initiator Properties (Targets Tab) Screen
2. Change the following settings. When finished, click the Advanced button.
 Select the Automatically restore this connection when the system boots option.
 Do not select the Enable multi-path option.
291
User Guide
Figure C-25: Log On to Target Screen
3. Change the following settings. When finished, click the OK button.
Connection settings
 Select the Microsoft iSCSI Initiator option from the Local Adapter drop-down menu.
 Select the IP address of the local server from the Source IP drop-down menu.
 Select the IP address of the disk array host port (iSCSI port) from the Target Portal drop-down
menu.
CHAP Authentication Settings
 Select the CHAP logon information option.
 Enter password to be assigned to target in the Target Secret box.
 Select Execute mutual CHAP option when using mutual CHAP authentication.
292
User Guide
Figure C-26: Advanced Setting (General Tab) Screen
 The CHAP Secret can be specified as any string of 12 to 16
alphanumeric characters as well as !#$%&’*+~/=?{|}_-. Letters are
case-sensitive. For security, password text strings are indicated as dots
or other symbols.
 Mutual CHAP authentication is also described in Storage Manager
Command Reference as Bidirectional CHAP authentication.
For description of CHAP authentication, refer to Appendix O: "CHAP Authentication".
293
User Guide
The Target Secret that is set here is a password that a target uses to
authenticate an Initiator. This password is also required for settings on the
disk array side (see Section: 17.3.21 iSMcfg setldsetchap in the Storage
Manager Command Reference), so be sure to write it down so it is not
forgotten.
4. Click the OK button.
Figure C-27: Log On to Target Screen
294
User Guide
In the Log On to Target screen, the target for which Automatically
restore connection when computer boots has been specified is
registered as a Persistent Target in iSCSI Initiator Properties.
To change or delete the logon setting for this target, select the iqn of the
target to be deleted as a Persistent Target, and after it is deleted go to
the Targets tab under iSCSI Initiator Properties to set or change the
logon settings for that target.
Perform the following steps:
1. Select iqn of target.
2. Delete the selected iqn.
3. Check that the iqn status of the target disk array unit is shown as Connected (transition from
inactive).
 When adding registration of host port (iSCSI port) for the disk array (redundant configuration).
Click the Log On button.
 When not adding registration of host port (iSCSI port) for the disk array (non-redundant
configuration)
Click the OK button. This completes the operations.
295
User Guide
Figure C-28: iSCSI Initiator Properties (Targets Tab) Screen
When adding host port registration
4. Change the following setting. When finished, click the Advanced button.
 Select the Automatically restore this connection when the system boots option.
 Select the Enable multi-path option.
Under the settings for the newly registered disk array host port, select the Enable
multi-path option.
296
User Guide
Figure C-29: Log On to Target Screen
When registering additional host port
5. Change the following settings. When finished, click the OK button.
Connection settings
 Select the Microsoft iSCSI Initiator option from the Local Adapter drop-down menu.
 Select the IP address of the local server from the Source IP drop-down menu.
 Select the IP address of the disk array host port (iSCSI port) from the Target Portal drop-down
menu.
CHAP authentication settings
 Select the CHAP logon information option.
 Enter password to be assigned to target in the Target Secret box.
 Select Execute mutual CHAP option when using mutual CHAP authentication.
297
User Guide
Figure C-30: Advanced Setting (General Tab) Screen
 The CHAP Secret can be specified as any string of 12 to 16
alphanumeric characters as well as !#$%&’*+~/=?{|}_-. Letters are
case-sensitive. For security, password text strings are indicated as dots
or other symbols.
 Mutual CHAP authentication is also described in Storage Manager
Express as Bidirectional CHAP authentication.
For description of CHAP authentication, refer to Appendix O: "CHAP Authentication".
298
User Guide
The Target Secret that is set here is a password that a target uses to
authenticate an Initiator. This password is also required for settings on the
disk array side (see Section: 17.3.21 iSMcfg setldsetchap in the Storage
Manager Command Reference), so be sure to write it down so it is not
forgotten.
Additional host port registration
6. Click the OK button.
Figure C-31: Log On to Target Screen
7. To register additional disk array host ports, click the Log On button, and then perform steps (6) to
(8) for each port to be registered.
After the host port settings have been registered, click the OK button.
299
User Guide
Figure C-32: iSCSI Initiator Properties (Target Tab) Screen
300
User Guide
C.3.2 Confirmation Steps in Windows Environments
Perform the following step to confirm that the OS recognizes logical disk in the Windows environment:
1. Select Administrative Tools > Computer Management > Disk Manager to start.
2. Click Disk drives and check the number of logical disks.
If nothing is shown, the OS was unable to recognize logical disks in the disk array
assigned to a server. Check the connection between the server and disk array unit, the
Access Control settings, NIC driver settings, etc.
Display example: When four logical disks are assigned to a server.
Figure C-33: Device Manager
3. Open Disk Management and check the number of logical disks (number of logical disks assigned
to a server).
301
User Guide
Check the
number of
disks indicated
this icons.
Figure C-34: Disk Management
302
User Guide
C.3.3 Check the Multipath Settings and Status
When Multipath will not be used, this step is not necessary.
After checking the HOST cable connection between the application server and disk array unit, restart
the server and run the following command from the command prompt.
For details, refer to the Multipath User's Guide (Windows Version).
To check Multipath status, run the following command from the command prompt:
spsadmin /lun
Check the message shown after the command is executed then check the number of logical disks
assigned to the server, the number of access paths per logical disk, and each path status.
Display example: When two logical disks are assigned to a server, with two access paths per logical
disk
Following is an example of spsadmin/lun output:
C:\>spsadmin /lun
+++ LogicalUnit #0 +++
SerialNumber="0000000995000001", LDNumber=0x00000
LoadBalance=Least Size
0: ScsiAddress=2:0:0:0, Priority=1, Status=Active
1: ScsiAddress=3:0:0:0, Priority=2, Status=Standby
+++ LogicalUnit #1 +++
SerialNumber="0000000995000001", LDNumber=0x00001
LoadBalance=Least Size
0: ScsiAddress=2:0:0:1, Priority=1, Status=Active
1: ScsiAddress=3:0:0:1, Priority=2, Status=Standby
If nothing is displayed, none of the access paths recognized the logical disks of the disk
array unit assigned to the application server. Check the connection between the
application server and the disk array unit, the Access Control settings, NIC driver
settings, etc.
303
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server
(Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
D.1 Initializing Application Server
The target server machines are Novscale Express 5800 series (Novascale series, Novascale blade
series) as of June 2012.
D.1.1 Overview
Perform the following steps to initialize the application server in Windows environments.
304
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
Prepare for installation. For details, refer to Section
D.1.2: Preparation.
Specify the basic NIC settings including NPAR/SF
settings and enabling iSCSI Offload. For details,
refer to the manual of the target server machine.
Install BACS4 (Broadcom Advanced Control Suite
4). For details, refer to the manual of the target
server machine.
* If BACS4 has already been installed, skip this
step.
Install Multipath
For details, refer to Section C.1.3: Installing
StoreWay Multipath.
When Multipath will not be used, skip this step.
Set up the network to be used by the application
server by using BACS4.
For details, refer to Section D.1.3: Setting up
BACS4 (Broadcom Advanced Control Suite 4).
Set up the iSCSI initiator.
For details, refer to Section D.1.4: Setting up iSCSI
Initiator.
305
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
D.1.2 Preparation
1. Provide IP addresses for an application server
Prepare IP addresses to be assigned to the application server as many as the connection ports. In
addition, prepare the subnet mask and gateway addresses by asking the network administrator.
2. Connect to the disk array unit
Use a 10-Gbps cable to connect the application server to the host port (HP connector) of the disk
array unit.
FC cable can be used.
For a sample connection configuration, see Appendix L: iSCSI Connection
Configuration-Examples.
For the positions of the host ports, see “(5) Connect to the disk array unit” of Section C.1.1:
Preparation.
306
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
D.1.3 Setting up BACS4 (Broadcom Advanced Control Suite 4)
1. Stat Windows, and then activate BACS3 by selecting Start > All Programs > Broadcom >
Broadcom Advanced Control 4.
Figure D-1: BACS4 Start Screen
307
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
2. Open Adapter1 (BMC57810) displayed in the Explorer View window.
Figure D-2: Screen Displayed Immediately After Starting BACS4
308
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
3. Select the iSCSI Adapter to which an IP address is set on the Explorer View screen, and then click
Edit button displayed on the Configuration tab in the right pane.
Figure D-3: iSCSI Adapter - Configuration Tab
309
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
4. Change the settings as follows, and then click the OK button.
iSCSI IPv4 Configuration

Select the Disable DHCP option.

Enter an IP address in IP Address.

Enter a subnet mask IP address in Subnet Mask.

Enter a default gateway IP address in Default Gateway as necessary.
Figure D-4: iSCSI IPv4 Configurations Tab
310
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
5. Click the Apply button.
Figure D-5: Setting Change Confirmation Screen
6. Click the Yes button.
Figure D-6: Warning Message Dialog Box
7. If you need to set an IP address to other ports, repeat steps (3) to (6).
Otherwise, the BACS4 settings is complete.
311
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
D.1.4 Setting up iSCSI Initiator
Perform the following steps to install iSCSI Initiator in Windows Server 2008 R2 environments:
1. Select Start > Administrative Tools, and then start iSCSI Initiator.
2. Check iqn (iSCSi Qualified Name) displayed under Initiator Name on the Configuration tab in the
iSCSI Initiator Properties screen.
Figure D-7: iSCSI Initiator Properties - Configuration Tab
3. If mutual CHAP authentication will be used, click the CHAP button and enter the password.
312
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
4. On the Discovery tab of iSCSI Initiator Properties, click the Discover Portal button.
Figure D-8: iSCSI Initiator Properties - Discovery Tab
313
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
5. Enter the IP address of the disk array host port (iSCSI port) under IP address or DNS name.
Make sure that the entered IP address is correct, and then click the Advanced Settings button.
Do not change the Port setting “3206.”
Figure D-9: Discover Target Portal Dialog Box
314
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
6. Select a desired iSCSI Adapter from the Local adapter drop-down list under Connect using
on the General tab.
iSCSI Adapters that can be set up are displayed in the list. They are managed by tracking number
(#xx).
Figure D-10: Advanced Settings - Local Adapter Setup
315
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
7. From the Initiator IP drop-down list under Connect using on the General tab, select the IP
address that you have set up in step (4) of Section D.1.3: Setting up BACS4 (Broadcom Advanced
Control Suite 4). Then, click the OK button.
Figure D-11: Advanced Settings - Initiator IP Setup
316
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
8. Click the OK button.
Figure D-12: Discover Target Portal Dialog Box
If the following dialog box is displayed, click the OK button.
Figure D-13: Authorization Failure Dialog Box
317
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
9. If you want to add more IP addresses to the target portal, repeat steps (3) to (8).
10.The IP addresses that have been set up are displayed under Target portals of the Discovery tab.
The following shows the case that two IP addresses are specified for the target portal.
Figure D-14: Discovery Tab
318
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
D.2 Setting up iSCSI Software Initiator
Settings for the Windows Server 2008 R2 environment are described below.
D.2.1 Overview
Perform the following steps to connect the application server and disk array in Windows environments.
Confirm that an LD set has been created by
Storage Manager.
For details, refer to the Configuration Setting Tool
User’s Manual (GUI) for the OptimaX600 Series.
Log on to the target.
For details, refer to Section D.2.2: Logon Steps in
Windows Environments
Confirm that the OS recognizes the logical disk.
For details, refer to Section C.3.2: Confirmation
Steps in Windows Environments.
Check Multipath settings and status.
For details, refer to Section C.3.3: Check the
Multipath Settings and Status.
If Multipath will not be used, this step is not
necessary.
319
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
D.2.2 Logon Steps in Windows Environments
1. Click the Refresh under the Targets tab in iSCSI Initiator Properties. Then, the Initiator name
(iqn) of the disk array unit will be shown under Discovered targets. Select an iqn and click the
Connect button.
Figure D-15: iSCSI Initiator Properties - Targets Tab
320
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
2. Change the following settings in the Connect To Target dialog box. When finished, click the
Advanced button.
 If necessary, select the Add this connection to the list of Favorite Target option.
Selecting this option will make the system automatically attempt to restore the connection every
time this computer restarts.
 Do not select the Enable multi-path option.
Figure D-16: Connect To Target Dialog Box
321
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
3. On the General tab of the Advanced Settings screen, change the following settings. When
finished, click the OK button.
Settings for Connect using
 Select the iSCSI Adapter from the Local adapter drop-down list.
 Select the IP address of the local server from the Initiator IP drop-down list.
 Select the IP address of the disk array host port (iSCSI port) from the Target portal IP
drop-down list.
To use CHAP
 Select the Enable CHAP log on option.
 Enter password to be assigned to target in Target secret.
 Select Perform mutual authentication option when using mutual CHAP authentication.
Figure D-17: Advanced Setting - General Tab
322
User Guide
Appendix D How to Set/Check Application Server (Windows) (iSCSI HW Initiator)
4. Return to the Connect To Target dialog box, and then click the OK button.
5. Confirm that the status of the target disk array is shown ad Connected on the Targets tab of iSCSI
Initiator Properties
To make the connection path to the disk array of a redundant configuration, select the Initiator name
(iqn) of the disk array again, click the Connect button, and then perform steps (2) to (5) described
above.
To repeat this operation, select the Enable multi-path check box in the Connect To Target dialog box.
If this check box is not selected, an error message will be displayed and connection will not be able to
established.
323
Appendix E How to Set/Check Application Server (Linux)
(FC)
This appendix provides the steps you should follow while setting or checking application server in the Linux
environment, when the disk array is configured for the FC connection.
E.1 Installing Storage Manager Agent Utility
This section describes how to install the Storage Manager Agent Utility.
E.1.1 Before Installation
Note the followings before installing the Storage Manager Agent Utility. The following functions
become available by installing the Storage Manager Agent Utility.
 iSM volume list command
 Host agent (Host agent service)
 iSCSI Setup Tool
 Storage Manager Host Register Agent
Table E-1 shows the supported operating environment.
Table E-1: Operating Environment (Linux)
Operating systems
Red Hat Enterprise Linux Version 5 (*1)
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.5 to 5.7 (IA32/EM64T)
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.5 to 5.7 Advanced Platform
(IA32/EM64T)
Red Hat Enterprise Linux Version 6
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.1 (IA32/EMT64)
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server10
SUSE Linux Enterprise 10 SP3 (IA32/EM64T) (*2)
(*1) The iSCSI Setup Tool (sharing function) supports Red Had Enterprise
Linux 5.5 (IA32, EM64T).
(*2) Only for disk arrays connected via FC
Memory
OS required memory + 5 MB or more (IA32 server and EM64T server)
Disk capacity
12 MB or more
* Above are the supported environments for this version at the point of the initial shipment of this
product.
324
Appendix
User Guide
E.1.2 Installation
Install the Storage Manager Agent Utility by following the procedure below:
1. Log in as a root user.
2. Check that none of the following software has been installed:
iSMrpl (ReplicationControl)
iSMrcd (ReplicationControl/DisasterRecovery)
iSMsc (SnapControl)
iSMvol (iSM volume list command)
iSMagent (Storage Manager Agent Utility)
Run the following commands and check the results:
rpm -q iSMrpl
rpm -q iSMrcd
rpm -q iSMsc
rpm -q iSMvol
rpm -q iSMagent
If any of them has been installed, uninstall all of them.
3. Set the DVD-ROM in the application server.
On the server where DVD-ROMs are not available, transfer the file of iSMvol.rpm from
other server to install it.
4. Mount the DVD-ROM by performing one of the following:
Create a mount directory (Example: /cdrom)
Use the mount command for mounting.
mount -r /dev/cdrom /cdrom
5. Use the rpm command to start installation.
rpm -ivh /cdrom/VOLLIST/LINUX/iSMVOL/iSMvol.rpm
6. The installation is complete when the following message is shown:
Installation completed.
7. Unmount the DVD-ROM. Use the umount command for unmounting.
umount/cdrom
325
User Guide
E.2 Collecting/Registering Host Information on Application Server
E.2.1 Collecting Host Information by Using File Output
To collect host information by using file output, follow the procedure below.
1. Run host information collection command (iSMcc_hostinfo)
Run the host information collection command (iSMcc_hostinfo) from the command line. For the
-export option, specify a file (host information file) to which host information will be reported.
Run the host information collection command (iSMcc_hostinfo) as a root user.
# iSMcc_hostinfo -export /tmp/ServerName
iSMcc_hostinfo: Info:
iSM11700: Please wait a minute.
iSMcc_hostinfo: Info:
iSM11770: Host Information was exported
successfully. code=
aaaa-bbbb-bbbb-bbbb)
iSMcc_hostinfo: Info:
iSM11100: Command has completed
successfully.
2. Confirm the result of running the command
After running the host information collection command (iSMcc_hostinfo), confirm that the
message No. iSM11770 is reported and the host information is successfully collected. aaaa in the
message example above is replaced with a process number and bbbb with an internal code for
maintenance in the actual message.
3. Transfer the host information file
Transfer the host information file reported by using the host information collection command
(iSMcc_hostinfo) to a client by using file transfer, USB memory and other methods.
To register host information files transferred to clients, see Section E.2.2: “Registering Host
Information by Using File Output”.
326
Appendix
User Guide
E.2.2 Registering Host Information by Using File Output
To register host information by using file output, follow the procedure below.
1. Report a host information file.
See Section E.2.1: “Collecting Host Information by Using File Output” to report a host information
file.
2. Transfer the host information file.
Use file transfer, USB memory or other methods to transfer the host information file to a client.
3. Register the host information by using Storage Manager.
On the left pane on the Storage Manager window, click Configuration> Host > Host Information
Collection to open the host information registration window.
Figure E-1: Getting Started - Host Information
4. Select host information setting method.
327
User Guide
Figure E-2: Set Host Information - Select How to Set
Select the Update with host information file and click Next.
5. Specify the host information file.
328
Appendix
User Guide
.
Figure E-3: Set Host Information - Specifying Host Information File
a. Click Browse to specify a file in which host information is recorded and click Add.
b. Confirm that all the host information is retrieved and click Next.
This displays the Host information setting completion page.
6. Check the Host information Collection Completion page.
329
User Guide
Figure E-4: Host Information Collection - Completion
The result of setting host information is displayed. Click Finish to close the page.
330
Appendix
User Guide
E.3 Checking Connection from Application Server
This section describes how to check connection in Linux environment and check the Multipath settings
and status.
E.3.1 Confirmation Steps in Linux environment
After checking the FC cable connection between the application server and disk array unit, restart the
application server and run the following command to check the number of logical disks ("No. of logical
disks assigned to application server" × “No. of access paths from application server to individual logical
disks”) and the respective vendor and model names (Bull SAS, DISK ARRAY).
If nothing is shown, the OS was unable to recognize logical disks in the disk array
assigned to an application server. Check the connection between the server and disk
array unit, the Access Control host bus adapter driver settings, etc.
Display example: When two logical disks are assigned to a server, with two access paths per logical
disk.
331
User Guide
In the environment where Multipath is installed, in some cases, depending on the Linux
kernel version, the logical disks that can be controlled by Multipath are displayed after the
logical disks recognized by the OS via the host bus adapter (comprised in the above
example of host bus adapter #1 and host bus adapter #2).
E.3.2 Check the StoreWay Multipath Settings and Status
When Multipath will not be used, this step is not necessary.
After checking the FC cable connection between the application server and disk array unit, restart the
server and run the following command from the command prompt.

For details, refer to the StoreWay MultiPath for Linux User's Guide - 86 A2 93ER
1. Check the kernel version
Check that the installedMultipath supports the currently used kernel.
Check that kernel version (A) number shown under uname -r matches the value shown for kernel
version (B) under rpm -qi.
332
Appendix
User Guide
# uname -r
2.6.X-XX
# rpm -qa | grep sps
sps-drivers-E-5.x.x
sps-utils-5.x.x-x.x
# rpm -qi sps-drivers-E-5.x.x
Name : sps-driver-E
Relocations: (not relocatable)
Version : 5.x.x
Vendor: Bull
Release : 2.6.x.x.x
Build Date: xxxx(year) xx (month) xx
(day) xx (hour) xx (min) xx (sec)
Install Date: xxxx(year)xx(month)xx(day) xx(hour)xx(min)xx(sec) Build
Host: nec.co.jp
Group
: System Environment/Kernel
Source RPM:
sps-driver-E-5.x.x-2.6.x.x.x.src.rpm
Size
: xxxx
License: GPL
Signature : (none)
Packager : Bull
Summary
: Multipath for Linux
Description :
-------------------------------------------------------------------The driver (dd_mod,sps_mod,sps_mod2) provides the redundant SCSI-path
for
BullMultipath Disk Array System.
This Driver works on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 (2.6.x-x.x)
Display may vary slightly among different operating systems.
2. Check the Multipath status
Check /proc/scsi/sps/ddX, where X is a, b, c, ... (number of logical disks assigned to server).
The path-info: line exists only for multiplexed sections of each device, and if NML appears in all of
the status columns of device-info:, paths are normally multiplexed.
If nothing is shown, none of the access paths recognized the logical disks of the disk array
unit assigned to the application server. Check the connection between the application
server and the disk array unit, the Access Control settings, host bus adapter driver
settings, etc.
Display example: When two logical disks are assigned to a server, with two access paths per logical
disk.
333
User Guide
# cat /proc/scsi/sps/dda
device:/dev/dda
disk-info:BULL,DISK ARRAY,xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx,xxxxx
device-info:Host:scsi:2 Channel:0 Id:0 Lun:0 Watch:Enable Status:NML
LoadBalance:D2
path-info:0 Host:scsi:0 Channel:0 Id:0 Lun:0 Priority:1 Status:ACT
path-info:1 Host:scsi:1 Channel:0 Id:0 Lun:0 Priority:2 Status:HOT
#
3. Check the path patrol daemon
Confirm that the path patrol daemon is running.
When the path patrol daemon is started, the following message is displayed.
# /etc/rc.d/init.d/dd_daemon status
dd_daemon (pid XXX) is running ...
#
334
Appendix
User Guide
335
Appendix F How to Set/Check Application Server (Linux)
(iSCSI)
This appendix provides the steps you should follow while setting or checking an application server in the Linux
environment, when the disk array is configured for the iSCSI connection.
F.1 Initializing Application Server
Perform the following steps to initialize the application server in Linux environment.
Prepare for installation.
For details, refer to Section F.1.1: Preparation.
Install the iSCSI-initiator-utils package.
For details, refer to Section F.1.2: Installing iSCSI
Software Initiator.
If the iSCSI-initiator-utils package has already been
installed, this step is not necessary.
Install Multipath.
For details, refer to Section F.1.3: Installing
StoreWay Multipath.
When Multipath will not be used, this step is not
necessary.
This describes how to set up the Open-iSCSI driver
and CHAP authentication.
For details, refer to Section F.1.4: Setting up iSCSI
Software Initiator.
336
Appendix
User Guide
F.1.1 Preparation
Perform the following steps to prepare for installation of application server in the Linux environment:
1. Provide IP addresses for an application server
Prepare IP addresses to be assigned to the application server as many as the NIC (1000BASE-T or
10GBASE-SR) ports. In addition, prepare the subnet mask and gateway addresses by asking the
network administrator.
2. Install NIC (1000BASE-T or 10GBASE-SR)
Install the NIC to the application server as described in the manuals provided with the NIC and
application server.
If the NIC has already been installed to the application server, this step is not necessary.
3. Install the NIC (1000BASE-T or 10GBASE-SR) driver
Install and set up the driver according to the setup procedure in the manual provided with the NIC
installed in the server, or by referencing information provided on the Web, etc.
If the driver has already been installed and set up for the NIC installed in the application
server, this step is not necessary.
4. Specify the network settings
Select Start > Control Panel > Network Connection, and then open Local Area Connection
Properties to specify the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
5. Connect to the disk array unit
Use a 10-Gbps or 1-Gbps cable to connect the application server to the host port (HP connector) of
the disk array unit.

Unit equipped with NF53x1-xF21xx (unit with 10Gbps iSCSI 2port controllers)
10-Gbps cable
Connector shape: LC connector
NF9320-SJxx (FC cable) can be used.

Unit equipped with NF53x1-xF11xx (unit with 1Gbps iSCSI 2port controllers)
1-Gbps cable
Connector shape: RJ-45 connector
 CAT6 LAN cable is recommended.
 Either straight cable or crossover cable can be used.
337
User Guide
For a sample connection configuration, see Appendix L: "iSCSI Connection
Configuration-Examples".
The following shows the positions of the host ports.
Figure F-1: Unit with NF53x1-xF21xx (10Gbps iSCSI 2port Controllers)
Figure F-2: Unit with NF53x1-xF11xx (1Gbps iSCSI 2port Controllers)
The following shows an example of a 10-Gbps iSCSI connection (redundant path configuration in
combination with Multipath).
To implement the following recommended example, two NICs must be installed in the application
server and two 10-Gbps cables are needed to connect the disk array unit and NICs.
Use a 10-Gbps cable to connect the NIC to the host port (HP connector) of the disk array unit. (The
10-Gbps cable has the same connector shape on both ends.)
338
Appendix
User Guide
Figure F-3: Configuration Example
339
User Guide
F.1.2 Installing iSCSI Software Initiator
Installation of iscsi-initiator-utils package is necessary.
Install the package by following the procedures on the manual of the operating system or the
information provided on the website.
 This procedure is unnecessary if the installation of iscsi-initiator-utils package is already
finished.
 Open-iscsi is installed as standard DBM database. Discovery (discovery.db) and Node
(node.d) tables are included. The iSCSI database files are stored in /etc/iscsi/.
Install iscsi-initiator-utils package.
# yum install iscsi-initiator-utils
340
Appendix
User Guide
F.1.3 Installing StoreWay Multipath
See Section I.2: For Linux Application Server for installation procedure.
This operation is not necessary if you do not install StoreWay Multipath.
341
User Guide
F.1.4 Setting up iSCSI Software Initiator
Perform the following steps to install iSCSI Software Initiator in the Linux environment:
Set up Open-iSCSI Driver
1. Run the following command from the console to stop the iSCSI service.
# service iscsid stop
If the iSCSI service has already been stopped, this step is not necessary.
2. Use vi or another editor to open the /etc/iscsi/iscsid.conf file on the server.
3. After changing the settings in the variables shown in Table F-1: Open-iSCSI Driver Settings to the
following values, save and close the file.
node.startup = Automatic
node.session.timeo.replacement_timeout = 30
Table F-1: Open-iSCSI Driver Settings
Variable name
Default value
Set value
Remarks
node.startup
No
Automatic
Automatically log on after
the server reboots
node.session.timeo.replacement_
timeout
120
30
Shorten the failover time
when using Multipath
4. Run the following command from the console to start the iSCSI service.
# service iscsi start
5. Run the following command from the console to confirm that the iSCSI service is operating.
# /etc/init.d/iscsi status
Set up CHAP Authentication
If CHAP authentication will not be used, this step is not necessary.
For description of CHAP authentication, refer to Appendix O: "CHAP Authentication".
 Setup method when using CHAP authentication of Initiator.
342
Appendix
User Guide
1. Use vi or another editor to open the /etc/iscsi/iscsid.conf file on the server.
2. After editing the file as shown below, save and close the file.
node.session.auth.authmethod = CHAP
node.session.auth.username = <iqn (username) of server>
node.session.auth.password = <password of CHAP Initiator>
(Example)
node.session.auth.authmethod = CHAP
node.session.auth.username = iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft.exp120rj
node.session.auth.password = jR021_0085sserpxE
3. Restart the iSCSI service
# /etc/init.d/iscsi stop
# /etc/init.d/iscsi start
The CHAP Initiator password that is set here is a password that a target uses
to authenticate the Initiator. This password is also required for settings on the
disk array side (see Section: 17.3.21 iSMcfg setldsetchap in the Storage
Manager Command Reference), so be sure to write it down so it is not
forgotten.
 Setup method when using bidirectional CHAP authentication.
1. Use vi or another editor to open the /etc/iscsi/iscsid.conf file on the server.
2. Edit the file as shown below, then save and close the file.
node.session.auth.authmethod = CHAP
node.session.auth.username = <iqn (username) of server>
node.session.auth.password = <password of CHAP Initiator>
node.session.auth.username_in= <iqn (username) of disk array>
node.session.auth.password_in = < password of CHAP target>
(Example)
node.session.auth.authmethod = CHAP
node.session.auth.username = iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft.exp120rj
node.session.auth.password = jR021_0085sserpxE
node.session.auth.username_in =
iqn.2001-03.jp.nec:storage01:ist-m000-sn0000000938209213.wn-0.target0000 -p 192.168.10.64:3260
node.session.auth.password_in = i3DegarotsiCEN
343
User Guide
3. Restart the iSCSI service.
# /etc/init.d/iscsi stop
# /etc/init.d/iscsi start
The CHAP Initiator password that is set here is a password that a target uses
to authenticate the Initiator. This password is also required for settings on the
disk array side (see Section: 17.3.21 iSMcfg setldsetchap in the Storage
Manager Command Reference), so be sure to write it down so it is not
forgotten.
Execute Discovery
 Method when not using iSNS (Internet Storage Name Service) server
Use the iscsiadm command to search for the target.
# iscsiadm -m discovery -t sendtargets -p <IP address of disk array>
(Example)# iscsiadm -m discovery -t sendtargets -p 192.168.1.1:3260
 Method when using iSNS server
1. Use vi or another editor to open the /etc/iscsi/iscsid.conf file on the server.
2. Set the IP address and port number of the corresponding iSNS server.
3. Restart iSCSI service.
# /etc/init.d/iscsi stop
# /etc/init.d/iscsi start
4. Get Initiator information from an application server registered to iSNS server.
See Appendix N: "Retrieve Initiator Information on Application Servers Registered with iSNS
Server".
When using iSNS server, the Initiator name of the application server must be directly
entered under the Initiator settings in the iSCSI Setup Tool.
344
Appendix
User Guide
F.2 iSCSI Setup Tool
Run the iSCSI Setup Tool on an application server to configure the iSCSI settings required for the
application server. Before starting the following section, you need to install the Storage Manager Agent
Utility. See Section D.1.1: Overview for details on how to install the Storage Manager Agent Utility.
1. Run the following script on the application server.
# iSMiSCSISetup.sh
2. When a list of serial numbers is shown as follows, enter a list number corresponding to the serial
number of the disk array unit you want to configure.
1) 0000000991000001
2) 0000000991000002
3) 0000000991000003
4) 0000000991000004
Please select serial number.
3. The following message appears to confirm whether to use CHAP authentication. Enter y to use the
CHAP authentication. Enter n to skip the CHAP authentication.
To use CHAP authentication, please enter ‘y’. [y/n]
4. When n is entered to skip the CHAP authentication, proceed to step (9). When y is entered to use
the CHAP authentication, the following message appears. Enter the password of the CHAP initiator.
Please enter the target CHAP secret.
5. To confirm, enter the password of the CHAP initiator again.
Please enter password again.
6. This is to confirm whether to use mutual CHAP authentication. Enter y to use the mutual CHAP
authentication. Enter n to skip the mutual CHAP authentication.
To use mutual CHAP authentication, please enter ‘y’. [y/n]
7. Proceed to step (9) when n is entered to skip the CHAP authentication. If y is entered to use the
mutual CHAP authentication, the following message appears. Enter the password of the CHAP
target.
Please enter the initiator secret.
345
User Guide
8. To confirm, enter the password of the CHAP target again.
Please enter password again.
9. The IP addresses of the disk array are listed as follows. Enter a list number corresponding to the IP
addresses of the disk array. iSCSI Setup Tool runs a ping command using the IP addresses that are
set in the host connection port parameters. It does not show failed results and delete the failed ones
from the search result of the target.
1) Serial number=0000000991000004,
address=172.168.1.101
2) Serial number=0000000991000004,
address=172.168.1.102
3) Serial number=0000000991000004,
address=172.168.2.101
4) Serial number=0000000991000004,
address=172.168.2.102
Please select target IP address.
Controller=0, IP
Controller=0, IP
Controller=1, IP
Controller=1, IP
10.After the following message appears to confirm whether to create an LD set, enter y to proceed.
To create LD set, please enter ‘y’. [y/n]
11.When the process is successfully complete, a list of the IP addresses appears as follows:
Succeed to log on to the target.
Serial number=XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX, Controller=X, IP
address=XXX.XXX.X.XXX
The above is an example. You will actually see the serial number, controller number and IP address of
the target. You can specify a parameter file as shown below.
# iSMiSCSISetup.sh [–f <parameter name> [-n]]
 When you specify -f <parameter name>, a parameter is loaded from the file specified.
 When you specify -n, a dry run is performed to check for any parameter error, and does not
process
The details of the parameter file are described as follows.
Details
-m <Serial number>
-I <Password of CHAP initiator>
-t <Password of CHAP target>
-p <IP address of host connection port>
346
Appendix
User Guide
Descriptions
 In case CHAP authentication is not used, you do not need to supply a password of the CHAP
initiator and a password of the CHAP target. When you use CHAP authentication, use the initiator
name for the user name of CHAP initiator.
 In case mutual CHAP authentication is not used, you do not need to supply a password of CHAP
target. When you use mutual CHAP authentication, use the target name for the user name of CHAP
target.
 Lines, where any other letters than ones mentioned above is specified followed by a hyphen (-), are
ignored and the operation continues.
For example: When CHAP authentication is not used.
–m 0000000991000004
-p 172.168.1.101
For example: When Mutual CHAP authentication is used.
–m 0000000991000004
–i jR0210085sserpxE
–t i3DegrarotsiCEN
-p 172.168.1.101
 Because the port number 2730 is used, you need to set the exception for
the firewall.
 iSCSI Initiator needs to be installed and the service must be started in
advance.
 If you use the CHAP authentication with two or more disk arrays, please
follow the procedures shown as below.
Procedures
a. Configure the iSCSI setting using iSCSI Setup Tool.
b. Execute the following command in the order as below. (If there are
two or more IP addresses succeeded to log on, execute the iscsiadm
command repeatedly to each IP address.)
service iscsi stop
iscsiadm -m node -o delete -p <target IP addresss
succeeded to log on in step a.>
service iscsi start
c. Select the IP address of another disk array by iSCSI Setup Tool, and
configure the iSCSI setting.
d. Execute the following command. (If there are two ore more IP
addresses succeeded to log on, use the first IP address specified in
step b.)
iscsiadm -m discovery -t sendtargets -p <target IP
addresss succeeded to log on in step a.>
347
User Guide
e. Execute the following commands.
iscsiadm -m node --targetname <target name
specified in step /a/> -p <target IP addresss
succeeded to log on in step /1/> --op update -n
node.session.auth.authmethod -v CHAP
iscsiadm -m node --targetname <target name
specified in step /a/> -p <target IP addresss
succeeded to log on in step /1/> --op update -n
node.session.auth.username -v <initiator name>
iscsiadm -m node --targetname <target name
specified in step /a/> -p <target IP addresss
succeeded to log on in step /a/> --op update -n
node.session.auth.password -v <CHAP password for
the initiator>
f. If you use mutual CHAP authentication, execute the following
commands.
iscsiadm -m node --targetname <target name
specified in step a.> -p <target IP address
succeeded to log on in step 1.> --op update -n
node.session.auth.username_in -v <target name
specified in step a.>
iscsiadm -m node --targetname <target name
specified in step a.> -p <target IP address
succeeded to log on in step a.> --op update -n
node.session.auth.password_in -v <CHAP password for
the target>
g. Execute the following command.
(If there are two or more IP addresses succeeded to log on, repeat
the steps e-g)
iscsiadm -m node --targetname <target name
specified in step a.> -p <target IP address
succeeded to log on in the step a.> -l
* If you use three or more disk arrays, repeat the procedures in steps a-b
repeatedly, and then perform the procedure in step c for the last disk array
unit. And then perform the procedure the steps d–g repeatedly for each
disk arrays you have done the procedures in step a-b.)
348
Appendix
User Guide
F.3 Checking Connection from Application Server
Perform the following steps to connect the application server and disk array in Linux environment.
Log on to the target.
For details, refer to Section : .
Confirm the that OS recognizes the logical disk.
For details, refer to Section F.3.2: Confirmation steps in
Linux Environment.
Check Multipath settings and status.
If Multipath will not be used, this step is not necessary.
F.3.1 Logon Steps in Linux Environment
1. Search for target.
# iscsiadm –m discovery –t sendtargets –p <IP address of disk array>
(Example)# iscsiadm -m discovery -t sendtargets -p 192.168.10.64:3260
2. Log on to target.
# iscsiadm –m node -T <iqn of disk array> -p <IP address of disk
array> -l
(Example)# iscsiadm –m node –T
iqn.2001-03.jp.nec:storage01:ist-m000-sn0000000938209213.
wn-0.target0000 -p 192.168.10.64:3260 -l
349
User Guide
F.3.2 Confirmation steps in Linux Environment
Run the following command to check the number of logical disks (No. of logical disks assigned to
application server × No. of access paths from application server to individual logical disks) and the
respective vendor and model names (Bull SAS, DISK ARRAY).
# cat /proc/scsi/scsi
If nothing is shown, none of the access paths recognized the logical disks of
the disk array unit assigned to the application server. Check the connection
between the application server and the disk array unit, the Access Control
settings, NIC driver settings and so on.
Display example: When two logical disks are assigned to a server, with two access paths per logical
disk.
* In the environment where Multipath is installed, in some cases, depending on the Linux kernel
version, the logical disks that can be controlled by Multipath are displayed after the logical disks
recognized by the OS via the NIC (comprised in the above example of NIC#1 and NIC#2).
350
Appendix
User Guide
F.3.3 Check the Multipath Settings and Status
When Multipath will not be used, this step is not necessary.
1. Check the kernel version
Check that the installed Multipath supports the currently used kernel. Check that kernel version (A)
number shown under uname -r matches the value shown for kernel version (B) under rpm -qi.
# uname -r
2.6.X-XX
Kernel Version (A)
# rpm -qa | grep sps
sps-drivers-E-5.x.x
sps-utils-5.x.x-x.x
# rpm -qi sps-drivers-E-5.x.x
Name
: sps-driver-E
Relocations: (not relocatable)
Version : 5.x.x
Vendor: Bull SAS
Release : 2.6.x.x.x
Build Date: xxxx(year) xx (month) xx
(day) xx (hour) xx (min) xx (sec)
Install Date: xxxx(year) xx (month) xx (day) xx (hour) xx (min) xx
(sec) Build Host: nec.co.jp
Group
: System Environment/Kernel
Source RPM:
sps-driver-E-5.x.x-2.6.x.x.x.src.rpm
Size
: xxxx
License: GPL
Signature : (none)
Packager : Bull SAS
Summary
: Multipath for Linux
Description :
--------------------------------------------------------------------The driver (dd_mod,sps_mod,sps_mod2) provides the redundant SCSI-path
for
iStorage Disk Array System.
Kernel Version (B) supported
by Multipath
This Driver works on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 (2.6.x-x.x)
351
User Guide
2. Check the Multipath status
Check /proc/scsi/sps/ddX, where X is a, b, c, ... (number of logical disks assigned to
server).
The path-info: line exists only for multiplexed sections of each device, and if NML appears in all
of the status columns of device-info:, paths are normally multiplexed.
If nothing is shown, none of the access paths recognized the logical disks
of the disk array unit assigned to the application server. Check the
connection between the application server and the disk array unit, the
Access Control settings, NIC driver settings and so on.
Display example: When two logical disks are assigned to a server, with two access paths per
logical disk.
# cat /proc/scsi/sps/dda
device:/dev/dda
disk-info:BULL SAS,DISK ARRAY,xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx,xxxxx
device-info:Host:scsi:2 Channel:0 Id:0 Lun:0 Watch:Enable Status:NML
LoadBalance:D2
path-info:0 Host:scsi:0 Channel:0 Id:0 Lun:0 Priority:1 Status:ACT
path-info:1 Host:scsi:1 Channel:0 Id:0 Lun:0 Priority:2 Status:HOT
#
3. Check the path patrol daemon
Confirm that the path patrol daemon is operating. When the path patrol daemon is started, the
following message is displayed.
# /etc/rc.d/init.d/dd_daemon status
dd_daemon (pid XXX) is running ...
#
352
Appendix
User Guide
353
Appendix G How to Set/Check Application Server
(VMware) (FC)
When the disk array is configured for the FC connection, an application server in the VMware environment is
set and checked by using the VMware standard function. For details on how to use VMware functions, see the
documents issued by VMware Inc.
354
Appendix H How to Set/Check Application Server
(VMware) (iSCSI)
This appendix provides the steps you should follow while setting or checking an application server in the
VMware environment, when the disk array is configured for the iSCSI connection.
H.1 Initializing Application Server
Perform the following steps to initialize the application server in the VMware environment.
The following describes the steps for using software iSCSI Initiator in the ESX Server
environment.
Prepare for installation.
For details, refer to Section H.1.1: Preparation.
Create a VMKernel port and connect iSCSI to the
network.
For ESX Server 3, connect the service console to the
iSCSI network.
For details, refer to Section H.1.2: Creating VMKernel
Port.
Set the iSCSI Software Initiator as active, and then set
the target address of the Initiator. If necessary, enter
settings for CHAP authentication.
For details, refer to Section H.1.3: Setting up Software
iSCSI Initiator.
355
Appendix
User Guide
H.1.1 Preparation
Perform the following steps to prepare for installation of application server in the VMware environment:
1. Provide IP addresses for an application server
Prepare IP addresses to be assigned to the application server as per the no. of NIC (1000BASE-T
or 10GBASE-SR) ports. In addition, prepare the subnet mask and gateway addresses by asking the
network administrator.
2. Install NIC (1000BASE-T or 10GBASE-SR)
Install the NIC to the application server as described in the manuals provided with the NIC and
application server.
If the NIC has already been installed to the application server, this step is not necessary.
3. Install the NIC (1000BASE-T or 10GBASE-SR) driver
Install and set up the driver according to the setup procedure in the manual provided with the NIC
installed in the server, or by referencing information provided on the Web and so on.
If the driver has already been installed and set up for the NIC installed in the application
server, this step is not necessary.
4. Specify the network settings
Select Start > Control Panel > Network Connection, and then open Local Area Connection
Properties to specify the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
5. Connect to the disk array unit
Use a 10-Gbps or 1-Gbps cable to connect the application server to the host port (HP connector) of
the disk array unit.

Unit equipped with NF53x1-xF21xx (unit with 10Gbps iSCSI 2port controllers)
10-Gbps cable
Connector shape: LC connector
NF9320-SJxx (FC cable) can be used.

Unit equipped with NF53x1-xF11xx (unit with 1Gbps iSCSI 2port controllers)
1-Gbps cable
Connector shape: RJ-45 connector
 CAT6 LAN cable is recommended.
 Either straight cable or crossover cable can be used.
356
User Guide
For a sample connection configuration, see Appendix L: "iSCSI Connection
Configuration-Examples".
The following shows the positions of the host ports.
Figure H-1: Unit with NF53x1-xF21xx (10Gbps iSCSI 2port Controllers)
Figure H-2: Unit with NF53x1-xF11xx (1Gbps iSCSI 2port Controllers)
The following shows an example of a 10-Gbps iSCSI connection (redundant path configuration in
combination with Multipath).
To implement the following recommended example, two NICs must be installed in the application
server and two 10-Gbps cables are needed to connect the disk array unit and NICs.
Use a 10-Gbps cable to connect the NIC to the host port (HP connector) of the disk array unit. (The
10-Gbps cable has the same connector shape on both ends.)
357
Appendix
User Guide
Figure H-3: Configuration Example
6. For the basic requirements when using iSCSI storage for ESX Server systems other than the
above, refer to the OS Manual or to information provided on the Web and so on.
7. Prepare VMware Infrastructure Client (VI Client) operating environment
VI Client is a key component that generates, manages, and supervises virtual machines, virtual
machine resources, and virtual machine hosts. VI Client must be installed on a Windows machine
that supports network connection of ESX Server or VirtualCenter server environment.
358
User Guide
H.1.2 Creating VMKernel Port
The following operations must be performed before configuring iSCSI storage.
 Create a VMKernel port for iSCSI Software Initiator.
 Connect the service console to an iSCSI network (only when with ESX Server 3).
Create a VMKernel port for iSCSI Software Initiator
1. Log in to VI Client.
Figure H-4: VMware Infrastructure Client Layout Screen
2. After selecting a server from the Inventory panel, click the Network button for the configuration.
This opens the Hardware Configuration page.
3. Click Add network.
4. Select VMKernel in the Connection Type screen of the Add Network Wizard, and then click the
Next button.
With ESX Server 3i, the Service Console option is not shown in the wizard screen.
359
Appendix
User Guide
Figure H-5: Add Network Wizard Screen (1)
5. In the VMKernel – Network Access screen of the Add Network Wizard, select the vSwitch to be
used or select Create Virtual Switch. Next, select the check box for the network type used by
vSwitch, and then click the Next button.
Figure H-6: Add Network Wizard Screen (2)
6. Under Port Group Properties in the VMKernel: connection setup screen of the Add Network
Wizard, select or type a network label and VLAN ID. For the IP setting, enter the IP address and
subnet mask. After completing the settings, click the Next button.
 Network Label: This name identifies the port group being created. When using this name to
configure a VMKernel service such as Vmotion or IP storage, this label specifies the virtual
adapter to connect to the port group.
 VLAN ID: This identifies the VLAN used for the port group's network traffic. A VLAN ID is not
required. Check with the network administrator to determine whether or not this must be set.
360
User Guide
Figure H-7: Add Network Wizard Screen (3)
7. A warning alarm is output if a default gateway has not been set. Click the Yes button.
A gateway setting is required when connecting to a machine that is not set for the same
IP subnet as the service console (ESX Server 3 only) or VMKernel.
Figure H-8: Warning Screen
8. Set the IP address of each gateway corresponding to the "routing" service consoles and VMkernel
in the DNS and Routing Configuration screen. After completing the settings, click the OK button.
361
Appendix
User Guide
Figure H-9: DNS and Routing Configuration Screen
9. Click the OK button. Check the content of the Settings Completed screen. If there are no
problems, click the Finish button.
Connect the service console to an iSCSI network (only when with ESX Server 3)
After creating a VMKernel port for iSCSI Software Initiator, connect a service console with the same
vSwitch as for the target VMKernel port.
This operation is not required when using ESX Server 3i.
1. After logging in to the VI Client, select a server from the Inventory panel. This opens the Hardware
Configuration Page for this server.
2. Click the Network button for the configuration.
3. On the right side of the screen, click the Properties button for the vSwitch associated with the
created VMKernel port.
4. Click the Add button for the port.
5. After selecting Service console in the Connection Type screen of the Add Network Wizard, click
the Next button.
362
User Guide
Figure H-10: Add Network Wizard Screen (4)
6. On the Service Console: Connection Settings screen of the Add Network Wizard, enter a
Network label to identify the port group that was created under Port Group Properties.
Select either Automatically retrieve IP settings or Use the following IP setting.
If you selected Use the following IP setting, enter the IP address and subnet mask, then click the
Edit button.
Figure H-11: Add Network Wizard Screen (5)
7. Enter the IP address of the default gateway for service control. When settings are completed, click
the Next button.
8. In the Settings Completed screen of the Add Network Wizard, use the Preview function to check
that vSwitch has been correctly configured, and then click the Finish button.
363
Appendix
User Guide
Figure H-12: Add Network Wizard Screen (6)
364
User Guide
H.1.3 Setting up Software iSCSI Initiator
To configure Software iSCSI Initiator, activate Initiator and then set the target address for Initiator. This
section describes the parameter settings related to CHAP authentication.
Activate Software iSCSI Initiator
Activate software iSCSI Initiator, so that ESX Server can be used.
1. After logging in to VI Client, select a server from the Inventory panel.
2. Click the Storage Adapter button under the hardware to be configured. (A list of available storage
adapters is displayed.)
3. After selecting an available software Initiator from the iSCSI software adapter, click Properties.
Figure H-13: Hardware Configuration Page Screen
4. Click the Configure button under the General tab in the iSCSI Initiator Properties screen.
Figure H-14: General Tab in iSCSI Initiator Properties Screen
365
Appendix
User Guide
5. Select the Enabled check box under Status in the General Properties screen. After completing the
settings, click the OK button.
Figure H-15: General Properties Screen
Set up detection address
Set the target detection address so that the software Initiator is able to designate access-enabled
storage resources on the network.
1. Click the Add button under the Dynamic Discovery tab in the iSCSI Initiator Properties screen.
Figure H-16: Dynamic Discovery Tab in iSCSI Initiator Properties Screen
2. Enter the IP address of the server to be used as the target sending iSCSI server. After completing
the settings, click the OK button.
366
User Guide
Figure H-17: Add Target Sending Server Screen
CHAP Parameter Settings
If CHAP authentication will not be used, this step is not necessary.
For description of CHAP authentication, refer to Appendix O: "CHAP Authentication".
1. Click the CHAP Authentication tab in the iSCSI Initiator Properties screen.
 The default CHAP parameters are shown under the CHAP Authentication tab.
 To change these CHAP parameters, click the Configure button.
367
Appendix
User Guide
Figure H-18: CHAP Authentication Tab in iSCSI Initiator Properties Screen
2. Click the CHAP Authentication tab in the iSCSI Initiator Properties screen and change the
following settings. After completing the settings, click the OK button.
Certificate

Select the Use the following CHAP credentials option to activate CHAP authentication
function.

Select the Use Initiator Name option to use the Initiator name as the CHAP name. Enter any
CHAP name to be used instead.

Enter the CHAP Secret in the CHAP Secret box.

Select Disable CHAP authentication to disable the CHAP authentication function.
368
User Guide
Figure H-19: CHAP Authentication Screen
For sessions after CHAP setup, the CHAP Secret is used to authenticate
the Initiator. This has no effect on any session that has already been
established. When CHAP has been disabled, the current session
continues until a restart or a forced log-out of the disk array unit is
executed. After a restart or a forced log-out of the disk array unit, it is no
longer possible to connect to any disk array that requires CHAP
authentication.
The CHAP Secret that is set here is a password that a target uses to
authenticate the Initiator. This password is also required for settings on the
disk array side (see Section: 17.3.21 iSMcfg setldsetchap in the Storage
Manager Command Reference), so be sure to write it down so it is not
forgotten.
369
Appendix
User Guide
H.2 Checking Connection from Application Server
Perform the following steps to connect the application server and disk array unit in a VMware
environment.
After executing a rescan, make sure that a list of
available adapters is shown by the software iSCSI
Initiator used to access software- activated iSCSI
storage disk array units.
For details, refer to Section H.2.1: Executing Rescan.
Set up a data store for the software-activated iSCSI
storage device.
For details, refer to Section H.2.2: Setting up a Data
Store.
Make sure that the logical disks are recognized by the
Guest OS.
For details, refer to Section H.2.3: Confirmation Using
Guest OS.
370
User Guide
H.2.1 Executing Rescan
Perform the following steps:
1. Use VI Client to select a server, then select Storage Adapter as the configuration hardware setting.
2. Click Rescan under Storage Adapter.
Select an available software Initiator from displayed list of available iSCSI software
adapters. This brings up a display of Initiator details such as the model name, IP
address, iSCSI name, detection method, iSCSI alias, and various detected targets.
Figure H-20: Hardware Configuration Screen (1)
3. Click Properties in Details.
Figure H-21: Hardware Configuration Screen (2)
371
Appendix
User Guide
4. Properties that can be added are shown under the General tab of the iSCSI Initiator Properties
screen.
The software Initiator configuration and default properties can be changed.
Figure H-22: General Tab in iSCSI Initiator Properties Screen
372
User Guide
H.2.2 Setting up a Data Store
Create a data store for a software-activated iSCSI storage device. After creating it, execute a rescan.
Disk/LUN from the ESX Server system can be used.
1. Use the VI Client to select a server, and then select Hardware > Storage under Configuration.
2. Click Add storage.
3. Select Disk/LUN, and then click the Next button.
Figure H-23: Add Storage Wizard Screen (1)
4. Select the iSCSI device to be used for the data store, and then click the Next button.
Figure H-24: Add Storage Wizard Screen (2)
373
Appendix
User Guide
5. Current disk layout is displayed. Check the current disk array layout. If there are no problems with
the settings, click the Next button.
6. The Disk/LUN Properties are now shown. Enter the data store name.
After completing the settings, click the Next button.
The data store name is shown in the VI Client. The label must be unique within the
current instance of the virtual Infrastructure.
7. Adjust the file system values and area to be used for data store. The default settings is to set the
storage device for all empty areas. After completing the settings, click Next.
Figure H-25: Add Storage Wizard Screen (3)
8. When the Completed Settings screen appears, check the data store configuration. If there are no
problems with the settings, click the Finish button.
Until now, a data store has been created in an iSCSI storage device that can be
accessed by Software Initiator.
9. Click the Change button.
374
User Guide
H.2.3 Confirmation Using Guest OS
Perform the following steps to confirm that the logical disks are recognized by the guest operating
system:
Confirmation in Windows Environment
1. Select Administrative Tools > Computer Management > Disk Manager to start.
2. Click Disk drives and check the number of logical disks (No. of logical disks assigned to server ×
No. of access paths from server to individual logical disks) and the respective disk drive names (Bull
DISK ARRAY SCSI Disk Device).
If nothing is shown, check the software iSCSI Initiator settings for the
ESX Server environment, the server-Storage connections, NIC driver
settings and so on.
3. Open Disk Management and check the number of logical disks (number of logical disks assigned
to server).
Confirmation in Linux Environment
Run the following command to check the number of logical disks (No. of logical disks assigned to
application server × No. of access paths from application server to individual logical disks) and the
respective vendor and model names (Bull, DISK ARRAY).
# cat /proc/scsi/scsi
If nothing is shown, check the software iSCSI Initiator settings for the ESX
Server environment, the server-Storage connections, NIC driver settings and
so on.
375
Appendix
User Guide
376
Appendix I Installing StoreWay Multipath
This appendix provides the steps you should follow while installing the StoreWay Multipath (hereinafter referred
to as Multipath) in a Windows or Linux application server.
I.1 For Windows Application Server
Use the setup CD-ROM and follow the steps below to install Multipath in a Windows application server:
1. Turn off the power supply of the server first and then disconnect all connections between the server
and the disk array unit. When SAN boot is enabled, the server should be connected to the disk
array unit via a single connection.
2. Power on the server and log in as a user having administrative authority (built-in-administrator for
Windows Server 2008) for the server where Multipath will be installed. Insert the setup CD-ROM of
Multipath in the CD/DVD drive of the server.
3. When the message shown below or a similar message appears, click Yes. If no message is shown,
run “iSpmStarter.exe” located in the root directory of the setup CD-ROM of Multipath.
Figure I-1: Storage Multipath Environment Checker
“iSpmStarter.exe” must be run when Multipath is installed in a server core
environment where no messages are shown. Before running
“iSpmStarter.exe”, make sure that the current directory is the root
directory of the CD/DVD drive in which the CD-ROM is inserted.
377
Appendix
User Guide
The following message may appear when the installation is performed by
any user other than OS-built-in-administrator. When you see this
message, click Continue.
4. The setup program for Multipath starts. Depending on the server status, either of the following two
message is shown:
 If you are installing Multipath on the server for the first time, the Welcome to the InstallSheild
Wizard for Storage Multipath page is shown. Click Next to proceed to step (5).
Figure I-2: Storage Multipath InstallShield Wizard - Welcome Page 1
378
User Guide
 If the same version of Multipath has already been installed, the maintenance page is shown.
Click Cancel to finish the installation.
Figure I-3: Storage Multipath InstallShield Wizard - Welcome Page 2
379
Appendix
User Guide
5. When the Ready to Install the Program page is shown, click Install to start the installation.
Figure I-4: Storage Multipath InstallShield Wizard - Ready to Install the Program
6. When the InstallShiled Wizard Completed page is shown, click Finish.
380
User Guide
Figure I-5: Storage Multipath InstallShield Wizard - Completed
7. When the following message asking for restart is shown, click Yes to restart the server.
Figure I-6: Storage Multipath Installer Information
8. When the server is restarted, connect the target disk array unit to the server. Multipath automatically
recognizes target disk array unit and paths allowing you to start operation.
The installation of Multipath is now complete.
381
Appendix
User Guide
I.2 For Linux Application Server
Perform the following steps to install Multipath on a Linux application server:
1. Navigate to the mount directory.
(For auto mount, the user is navigated to the auto mount directory.)
# cd /media/cdrom
#
2. Specify the -i option to install the RPM file (run the underscored command).
* 1. If the --silent option is not specified, the OS will not be restarted (The OS must
be restarted before you start using Multipath).
* 2. The --iscsi option must be specified for the iSCSI connection. Specify the
--iscsi option if the FC connection and the iSCSI connection are used together.
382
User Guide
When the kernel version number is 2.6.18-238.el5 (FC connection)
# sh install.sh -i --silent
====== Precheck for SPS Installation / Uninstallation =======
Distribution : RedHat
Architecture : i686
Kernel Version: Linux2.6
Kernel Details: 2.6.18-238.el5
--------- The following packages will be installed. --------driver :
./Express5800_100/RPMS/RHEL5/5.6/IA32/sps-driver-E-5.0.0-2.6.18.238.e
l5.i686.rpm
utils :
./Express5800_100/RPMS/RHEL5/5.6/IA32/sps-utils-5.0.0-0.i686.rpm
=============================================================
Preparing... ########################################### [100%]
1:sps-driver-E ########################################### [100%]
Preparing... ########################################### [100%]
1:sps-utils ########################################### [100%]
patching file rc.sysinit
Starting up sps devices:
Couldn't open /etc/sps.conf. No such file or directory.
This is always shown
when SPS is installed for
the first time. It does not
affect operation. I try auto setting...
Wait.
parsing... device:/dev/dda (OK)
parsing... disk-info:BULL SAS,DISK ARRAY ,0000000935000734,00001 (OK)
parsing... LoadBalance:D2 (OK)
parsing... path-info:0 Host:scsi:8 Channel:0 Id:0 Lun:0 Priority:1
Watch:Enable Status:ACT (OK)
parsing... path-info:7 Host:scsi:7 Channel:0 Id:0 Lun:0 Priority:2
Watch:Enable Status:HOT (OK)
Wait until all /dev/ddX is made..........END
dd_daemon (pid 3963) is running...
sps Install Completed......
#
Broadcast message from root (Thu Feb 25 14:15:57 2010):
The system is going DOWN for reboot in 1 minute!
3. When the installation is completed successfully, the message, sps Install Completed (shaded
area) is reported. If this message is not shown, it indicates the installation has failed, in which case,
see StoreWay Multipath for Linux User's Guide for information and actions to be taken.
383
Appendix
User Guide
4. When the installation is finished successfully, the system restarts after 1 minute. Check if the OS is
operating successfully.
The installation of Multipath is now complete
e.
384
Appendix J LED Inspection Checksheet
If you cannot monitor status using Storage Manager, the LEDs in the unit can be used to check on LED
status. If errors are detected, report the status indicated with an underline and the differing LED status to
expedite the identification of the abnormality source and the arrangements for its repair.For more details,
see Section 1.2.3: “LED Display”.
 When the LEDs blinks, write down the cycle or pattern (for example, lit 4 seconds and not lit 8
seconds) in parenthesis.
 When the LEDs, such as PS Status LED, are on in two colors, write down the colors in parenthesis.
J.1 Disk Array Controller
Table J-1: Disk Array Controller - Front
CONT0
CONT1
(1) UID LED (Blue)
On· Off · Blinking (aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa)
(2) SERVICE LED (orange)
On· Off · Blinking (aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa)
(3) POWER LED (Green)
On· Off · Blinking (aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa)
(4) STANDBY LED (White)
On· Off · Blinking (aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa)
(5) CONT UID LED (Blue)
On· Off · Blinking (aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa)
(6) CONT FAULT LED (orange)
On· Off · Blinking (aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa)
(7) CONT READY LED (Green)
On· Off · Blinking (aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa)
(8-1) FAN0 FAULT LED (orange)
On· Off · Blinking (aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa)
(8-2) FAN1 FAULT LED (orange)
On· Off · Blinking (aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa)
(9) BBU FAULT LED (orange)
On· Off · Blinking (aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa)
(6) CONT FAULT LED (orange)
On· Off · Blinking (aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa)
(7) CONT READY LED (Green)
On· Off · Blinking (aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa)
(8-1) FAN0 FAULT LED (orange)
On· Off · Blinking (aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa)
(8-2) FAN1 FAULT LED (orange)
On· Off · Blinking (aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa)
(9) BBU FAULT LED (orange)
On· Off · Blinking (aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa)
385
Appendix
User Guide
Table J-2: Disk Array Controller - Back
CLUSTER0
(1) PS Status LED (orange/Green)
On(aaaaaa) · Off(aaaaaa) · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(2-1) Maintenance Port
LINK LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(2-2) Maintenance Port
ACTIVE LED (orange/Green)
On(aaaaaa) · Off(aaaaaa) · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(2-3) Management Port
LINK LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking ( )
(2-4) Management Port
ACTIVE LED (orange/Green)
On(aaaaaa) · Off(aaaaaa) · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(2-5) CONT UID LED (Blue)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(3-1) DPE READY LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(3-2) DPE FAULT LED (orange)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(3-3) DPE#0 LINK LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(3-4) DPE#0 FAULT LED (orange)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(3-5) DPE#1 LINK LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(3-6) DPE#1 FAULT LED (orange)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-1) HPE READY LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-2) HPE ACCESS LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-3) HPE#0 LINK LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-4) HPE#0 ACCESS LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-5) HPE#1 LINK LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-6) HPE#1 ACCESS LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-7) HPE#2 LINK LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-8) HPE#2 ACCESS LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-9) HPE#3 LINK LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-10) HPE#3 ACCESS LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
386
User Guide
Table J-2: Disk Array Controller - Back(Contd.)
CLUSTER1
(1) PS Status LED (orange/Green)
On(aaaaaa) · Off(aaaaaa) · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(2-1) Maintenance Port
LINK LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(2-2) Maintenance Port
ACTIVE LED (orange/Green)
On(aaaaaa) · Off(aaaaaa) · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(2-3) Management Port
LINK LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking ( )
(2-4) Management Port
ACTIVE LED (orange/Green)
On(aaaaaa) · Off(aaaaaa) · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(2-5) CONT UID LED (Blue)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(3-1) DPE READY LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(3-2) DPE FAULT LED (orange)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(3-3) DPE#0 LINK LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(3-4) DPE#0 FAULT LED (orange)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(3-5) DPE#1 LINK LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(3-6) DPE#1 FAULT LED (orange)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-1) HPE READY LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-2) HPE ACCESS LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-3) HPE#0 LINK LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-4) HPE#0 ACCESS LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-5) HPE#1 LINK LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-6) HPE#1 ACCESS LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-7) HPE#2 LINK LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-8) HPE#2 ACCESS LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-9) HPE#3 LINK LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
(4-10) HPE#3 ACCESS LED (Green)
On · Off · Blinking (aaaaaa)
387
Appendix
User Guide
388
Appendix K Notes-Using iSCSI Supported Disk Array
Unit
This appendix describes the notes in using and setting the disk array unit that supports iSCSI protocol
(hereinafter called iSCSI supported disk array unit).
1. Notes on Setting
Host recognize volume is unnecessary for iSCSI supported disk array unit. However, if the host recognize
volume is set, it does not affect the operation.
2. Notes on Using
a. Combination of following environment does not support ESMPRO Agent.
At this time, Storage monitoring function (ESMStorageService) does not work.
 Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2003 R2
 Microsoft Software Initiator is installed
When monitoring internal disks in the Bull Server by using Microsoft Software Initiator and Storage
monitoring function (ESMStorageService), use Windows Server 2008 or later.
b. Available initiator name at Storage Manager is as follows.
Available character
Single byte alphanumeric characters*, ’:’ (colon), ’.’ (period), and ’-’ (hyphen)
The character entered in uppercase will be registered as
lowercase.
Number of
characters
223 characters
Available number of characters of the initiator name used in Windows software initiator is as follows. (as
of January, 2009)
Windows Server 2003
(Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator 2.08)
Equal or less than 221 characters
Windows Server 2008 (included in OS)
389
Appendix
User Guide
c. Following message may be written to syslog, when using Red Hat Enterprise Linux. This does not affect
the operation.
iscsid: received iferror -22
iscsid: received iferror -38
d. Following message may appear when performing discovery at each OS to detect the disk array unit.
This does not affect the operation.
 Windows Server 2003 (Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator 2.08)
Authorization Failure.
 Windows Server 2008 (include in OS))
Authorization Failure.
 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.2 (iscsi-initiator-utils-6.2.0.868-0.7.el5)
iscsiadm: discovery login to xx.xx.xx.xx rejected: initiator error
(02/02), non-retryable, giving up
390
Appendix L iSCSI Connection Configuration-Examples
This appendix provides examples of iSCSI connection configuration.
L.1 Connection Between Application Server and LAN
iSCSI network supports only independent configuration of public LANs (intranet).
Shared-storage configurations are not supported (but are enabled when using a VLAN) so that
eliminating disturbances and establishing a stable network connection prevent job I/O operations from
being interfered with.
Figure L-1: Connection Between Application Server and LAN
391
Appendix
User Guide
L.2 Connection Between Management Server and LAN
iSCSI networks and management networks can be interconnected in either separate or shared
configurations.
However, note with caution that Bull Storage connections cannot be made using iHP0/1 (iSCSI port).
1. Direct Connection Configuration
Separate from application server (recommended)
Figure L-2: Connection Between Management Server and LAN - Direct Configuration
392
User Guide
2. Switch Connection Configuration
1. Application server, Shared iSNS
server configuration
2. Management network and Shared iSCSI network
configuration
Figure L-3: Connection Between Management Server and LAN - Switch Configuration
3. Non-Supported Connection Configurations (Storage Manager connection using iSCSI port)
Figure L-4: Connection Between Management Server and LAN - Non-Supported Configuration
393
Appendix
User Guide
394
Appendix M Script for Reporting Information Registered
with iSNS Server
If large volume of information on initiators and targets is registered with iSNS Server, information
displayed by the isnscli ListAllNodesWithDetails command becomes large and makes
identifying initiator names difficult. You can use a vbs script to quickly perform identification and to
report only information required to identify initiator names.
Script name: isns.vbs
strComputer = "."
Set objWMIService = GetObject("winmgmts:\\" & strComputer & "\root\WMI")
Set colItems = objWMIService.ExecQuery( "SELECT * FROM
MSiSNSServerProvider_NodeClass",,48)
For Each objItem in colItems
If objItem.iSCSINodeType = 2 Then
Wscript.Echo "iSCSIName=" + objItem.iSCSIName
If objItem.iSCSINodeAlias <> "" Then
Wscript.Echo "iSCSINodeAlias=" + objItem.iSCSINodeAlias
Else
Wscript.Echo "iSCSINodeAlias="
End If
End If
Next
Following is the sample output displayed when isns.vbs script is run.
C:\>cscript //Nologo isns.vbs
iSCSIName=iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:server1
iSCSINodeAlias=<MS SW iSCSI Initiator>
iSCSIName=iqn.1994-05.com.redhat:41139fb1987e
iSCSINodeAlias=server2
395
Initiator
name of
the server2.
Appendix
User Guide
396
Appendix N Retrieve Initiator Information on Application
Servers Registered with iSNS Server
You can retrieve the initiator information on application servers registered with iSNS server and use it
for configuring the iSCSI settings of the disk array.
Follow the steps below to retrieve the initiator information:
1. Run the command to show and save the initiator information registered with the iSNS server.
Run the CLI that belongs to the iSNS server from the command prompt on the server where the
iSNS server works to show the initiator information registered with the iSNS server.
For details of the initiator information to be displayed, see Example 1 and Example 2.
Copy the initiator name of the target application server from the displayed information and save it (in
a text file or the like).
2. Transfer the saved initiator information.
Transfer the initiator information saved in a file by using a function such as file transfer to the PC
where Storage Manager Client (Web GUI) is used.
3. Configure the iSCSI of the disk array.
Example 1
When the host name can be identified by initiator name (typically used when the application
server is on Windows):
Run the isnscli ListNodes command from the command prompt to retrieve the initiator name of
the target application server
Following information is displayed on initiators and targets registered with iSNS server:.
C:\>isnscli ListNodes
The initiator name
of the server1
Nodes:
iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:server1
iqn.2001-03.jp.nec:storage01:ist-3-10-sn-0000000010000032.wn-server1.ta
rget0000
MSiSNSControlNode:0000050c
Success
397
Appendix
User Guide
Example 2
If the host name cannot be identified by initiator name (typically used when the application
server is on Linux):
Run the isnscli ListAllNodesWithDetails command from the command prompt to identify the
target application server by using the alias information, and then retrieve the initiator name (*).
Following detailed information is displayed on initiators and targets registered with iSNS server:
C:\>isnscli ListAllNodesWithDetails
The initiator name
of the server2
Nodes:
iqn.1994-05.com.redhat:41139fb1987e
--Entity Identifier: [server2]
Entity Registration Period: 900
--Portal IP address: 172.16.11.101
Portal port: 58367
ESI Interval: 300
ESI port: 54872
--iSCSI Name: [iqn.1994-05.com.redhat:41139fb1987e]
iSCSI node type: Initiator
The alias of the
initiator
Alias: [server2]
--PG iSCSI Name: [iqn.1994-05.com.redhat:41139fb1987e]
PG Portal IP address: 172.16.11.101
PG Portal port: 58367
PGT: 1
iqn.2001-03.jp.nec:storage01:ist-3-10-sn-0000000010000032.wn-server1.ta
rget0000
--Entity Identifier:
[iqn.2001-03.jp.nec:storage01:ist-3-10-sn-0000000010000032]
Entity Registration Period: 900
--Portal IP address: 172.168.1.111
Portal port: 3260
398
User Guide
--Portal IP address: 172.168.2.113
Portal port: 3260
--iSCSI Name:
[iqn.2001-03.jp.nec:storage01:ist-3-10-sn-0000000010000032.
wn-server1.target0000]
iSCSI node type: Target
Alias: [wn-server1]
--PG iSCSI Name:
[iqn.2001-03.jp.nec:storage01:ist-3-10-sn-0000000010000032.
wn-server1.target0000]
PG Portal IP address: 172.168.1.111
PG Portal port: 3260
PGT: 0
--PG iSCSI Name:
[iqn.2001-03.jp.nec:storage01:ist-3-10-sn-0000000010000032.
wn-server1.target0000]
PG Portal IP address: 172.168.2.113
PG Portal port: 3260
PGT: 0
MSiSNSControlNode:00000738
--Entity Identifier: [isns:00000003]
Entity Registration Period: 900
--iSCSI Name: [MSiSNSControlNode:00000738]
iSCSI node type: Control
Success
When large volume of information on initiators and targets is registered with iSNS Server,
you can use a script to quickly perform identification of the initiator name of the target
application server.
For details, see Appendix M, "Script for Reporting Information Registered with iSNS Server".
399
Appendix
User Guide
400
Appendix O CHAP Authentication
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) is an authentication method. This appendix describes
the CHAP authentication and its settings.
O.1 General
A random text string called a “challenge” is sent from the server to the client, and the client uses it as
the basis for encrypting its own “Secret” (password), which it returns. Because the server has the
client's Secret (password), it performs the same encryption and compares the result to the encrypted
code returned from the client to enable authentication of users.
O.2 Constraints on Secrets
 Although this device enables use of 12- to 32-character string lengths, typically Initiator restricts the
CHAP Secrets to 16-character (128-bit) strings. (As of February 2009)
 Do not set the same values to the Initiator CHAP Secret and the target CHAP Secret that are used
for bidirectional CHAP authentication.
O.3 Description of Operation Modes
1. CHAP authentication for Initiator
Only authentication of the application server (Initiator) from the disk array unit (iSCSI target) is
performed.
Only target CHAP Secret is set.
2. Bidirectional CHAP authentication
Authentication is performed mutually for the disk array unit (iSCSI target) and the application server
(Initiator). Both a target CHAP Secret and an Initiator CHAP Secret are set.
Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator refers to this as "Mutual CHAP".
O.4 CHAP Username Setting
1. Set the target name (when it can be set) as the CHAP username (target side).
2. Unless otherwise specified, set the Initiator name as the CHAP username (Initiator side).
(If using another name, maximum length is 256 characters.)
401
Appendix
User Guide
O.5 Correspondence between Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator Secret
Setting and iSMCLI
1. CHAP authentication for Initiator
<Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator> iSCSI Initiator Properties "target"
Log on
Log on to target
Advanced Settings (General tab) screen
Figure O-1: iSCSI Initiator Authentication Setting (General Tab) Screen
iSMCLI
iSMcfg setldsetchap -ldsetname ldset name -initiatorpwd CHAP Secret for
Initiator
2. Bidirectional CHAP authentication (mutual CHAP authentication)
<Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator> iSCSI Initiator Properties (General tab) screen
402
User Guide
Figure O-2: iSCSI Initiator (General Tab) Screen
Click Secret to view the iSCSI Initiator window.
Figure O-3: iSCSI Initiator CHAP Secret Input Window
iSMCLI
iSMcfg setldsetchap -ldsetname ldset name -initiatorpwd CHAP Secret for
Initiator -targetpwd bidirectional CHAP Secret
403
Appendix
User Guide
404
Appendix P Registering Host Information Manually
P.1 Registering host information manually (FC)
1. Host Information Collection
Select how to collect host information.
Figure P-1: Set Host Information - Setting Method
Parameter
Description
Create host information
manually.
Select this option by manually entering interfaces with host, host name,
platform, and WWPNs to configure host information.
Select Create host information manually and click Next.
405
User Guide
Appendix P Registering Host Information Manually
2. Set Host Information - Registration
Figure P-2: Set Host Information - Registration
Parameter
Description
Create host information manually.
Specify the interface of the host.
Host Name
Specify a host name.
Platform
Specify the platform.
Path List view
This list view lets you check the specified WWPNs.
Add WWPN button
Set the WWPNs for the host you are adding.
See “3. Set WWPNs.”
Specify the interface of the host, a host name, platform, WWPNs and then click the Set button to
register a new host.
406
User Guide
Appendix P Registering Host Information Manually
3. Set WWPNs
Set WWPNs to the host.
Figure P-3: Set Host Information - Assignment of WWPNs
Parameter
Description
Select from the WWPNs which
are recognized by disk array
automatically
You can select the WWPNs of the automatically recognized
host when the host is connected to the disk array.
Select from host information
You can select the WWPNs of the host that matches the host
name selected in the host selection field.
Type in
You can enter the WWPN directly.
Specify the WWPNs, and then click the OK button to display “2. Set Host Information - Registration.”
407
User Guide
Appendix P Registering Host Information Manually
4. Set Host Information - Completion
Figure P-4: Set Host Information - Completion
Parameter
Description
Assign logical disks to the host
Click this hyperlink to assign the bound logical disks to host
whose information has been retrieved.
Click Assign logical disk to the host.
See Section 5.3.6: “Assigning Logical Disks”.
408
User Guide
Appendix P Registering Host Information Manually
P.2 Registering host information manually (iSCSI)
1. Set Host Information - Registration
Figure P-5: Set Host Information - Registration
Parameter
Description
Host Name
Specify a host name.
Platform
Specify the platform.
Initiator List view
This list view lets you check the specified initiators.
Add button
Set the initiators for the host you are adding.
See “2. Set Initiators.”
Specify a host name, platform, initiators, and then click the OK button.
See Section 6.2.6: “Assigning Logical Disk”.
409
User Guide
Appendix P Registering Host Information Manually
2. Set Initiators
Set initiators to the host.
Figure P-6: Assignment of Logical Disks - Assignment of Initiators
Parameter
Description
Select
You can select the initiators of the host connected to the disk
array.
Type in
You can enter the initiator directly.
Specify the initiators, and then click the OK button to display “1. Set Host Information - Registration.”
410
Glossary
A
AccessControl
A program product ensuring security for a disk array, which is shared among multiple servers. It
determines if access to logical disks in the disk array is permitted from the application server.
ActiveX controls
ActiveX controls are software modules based on Microsoft's Component Object Model (COM)
architecture. An ActiveX control can be reused by many application programs within a computer or
among computers in a network. The ActiveX controls are comparable with Java applets.
Ambient temperature
Air temperature of the environment where the hardware equipment is kept. Maintaining an
appropriate ambient temperature is important for the proper functioning and longevity of equipment.
Antistatic bags
See Antistatic device.
Antistatic device
Any item like antistatic mat and antistatic bags is used to reduce static electricity charges on a
person's body or equipment. These are used for safety purpose like preventing fire when working
with flammable gases or liquids, or to prevent damage to static sensitive objects like electronic
components.
Antistatic gloves
See Antistatic device.
Antistatic mat
See Antistatic device.
Antistatic shoes
See Antistatic device.
Application server
A server that runs business applications using storage area on a storage system, which is
connected to the server through FC and/or iSCSI.
B
Battery backup retention time
The time for which the battery backup can keep the system functional in case of power supply
failure.
Battery Backup Unit
A Battery Backup Unit (BBU) provides reserve power in case of main power failure to ensure data
integrity.
411
BBU
See Battery Backup Unit.
C
Cache
Cache is a high speed memory component implemented at the controller level that temporarily
holds data so that any subsequent access to that data is faster. If requested data is contained in the
cache, this request can be served by simply reading the cache, which is faster. Otherwise, the data
has to be recomputed or fetched from its original storage location, which is comparatively slower.
Cache Fast Write
Cache Fast Write is a feature that allows data to be held only in cache instead of being written to
disk unless necessary. This improves the data I/O performance.
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) is a three-way authentication protocol
defined in RFC 1994. During initiator CHAP authentication, the initiator is authenticated from an
iSCSI target (disk array side). In mutual CHAP authentication, the iSCSI target (disk array side) and
the initiator (application server side) perform the authentication mutually.
CHAP
See Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol.
CHAP secret
CHAP secret is a password which is used during CHAP authentication.
Cross cable
This cable is used to directly connect two identical devices to each other without the use of a hub or
a switch.
D
Data replication
See Replication.
DE
See Disk Enclosure.
Disk array
A device that treats multiple disks as one large capacity disk. RAID technology is employed for
improving reliability and processing capability.
Disk Array Controller
The Disk Array Controller contains control system components and control disk enclosure(s) where
multiple physical disks are installed.
Disk Enclosure
A unit that contains multiple physical disks.
412
User Guide
Dummy carrier
An exclusive tray used for an uninstalled hard disk drive. A dummy carrier fills the slot for hard disk
drives.
Duplex
Duplex settings specify whether or not two devices can communicate in both directions
simultaneously. Duplex mode can be half duplex or full duplex. Half duplex allows communication in
both directions, but only one direction at a time. Full duplex allows communication in both directions
simultaneously.
F
FC
See Fibre channel.
FC Switch
See Fibre Channel Switch.
Fibre channel
The Fibre Channel standard defines a high-speed data transfer interface that is primarily used in
SANs.
Fibre Channel Switch
It is a network switch compatible with Fibre Channel protocol.
Firewall
Component of a computer system or a network that is designed to block unauthorized access while
permitting authorized communications.
Full duplex
See Duplex.
G
Gateway address
Indicates an address of the device such as router, which serves as an access point to a network.
H
Half duplex
See Duplex.
HBA
See Host Bus Adapter.
Host Bus Adapter
Host Bus Adapter (HBA) is the Fibre Channel (FC) interface card which connects a host server to a
SAN (Storage Area Network). It offers input/output (I/O) operations and physical connectivity
between the server and the storage device.
413
Host connection port
A port at the disk array controller, which is used to connect to application server.
Host information file
This file stores the host (application server) related information like host name, OS identification
information, and Host Bus Adapter (HBA) information.
Hub
A common connection point for devices in a network to form a single network segment. The hub
allows each device to talk to the other devices.
I
Initiator
See iSCSI initiator.
Internet Small Computer System Interface
A network storage protocol, which enables the transfer of SCSI commands between machines over
TCP/IP networks.
Internet Storage Name Service
A protocol that allows automatic discovery, management, and configuration of iSCSI and FC
devices on a TCP/IP network.
IPSec tunnel mode
IPsec is a suite of protocols for securing network connections. IPSec tunnel mode is useful for
protecting traffic between different networks where traffic passes through an intermediate, untrusted
network.
iqn
See iSCSI Qualified Name.
iSCSI
See Internet Small Computer System Interface.
iSCSI initiator
This serves as an iSCSI client and sends SCSI commands over an IP network to request services
from device (such as a disk array), known as targets.
iSCSI Qualified Name
Each iSCSI initiator and iSCSI target are given a unique iSCSI name known as iSCSI Qualified
Name (IQN), that conforms to the format specified in RFC 3720. Apart from IQN, other type of
addressing like Extended Unique Identifier (EUI) is also used.
iSCSI target
iSCSI target is a device (such as a disk array) to which the initiator sends data. iSCSI targets accept
sessions from the initiator, and receive and execute SCSI commands.
iSNS
See Internet Storage Name Service.
414
User Guide
J
Java Runtime Environment
A software component that is required to be installed on a computer system to be able to run Java
applets and applications.
JRE
See Java Runtime Environment.
L
LED
See Light Emitting Diode.
Light Emitting Diode
Light Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor light source used in devices to provide visual
indications of hardware status or malfunctions.
Logical disk
A software technology, which recognizes a virtual disk (area) as an independent disk in a computer
system. Logical disk(s) are created from the pool using Storage Manager. Also, see Pool.
M
Management server
A server that runs the Storage Manager Suite for centralized configuration and management of
multiple disk arrays, including the old D/S series, connected through a LAN.
Maximum Transmission Unit
A Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) is the largest size packet, specified in bytes, that can be sent
over a network.
MTU
See Maximum Transmission Unit.
Mutual CHAP authentication
See Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol.
P
Multipath
A software that allows multi-path connection between a application server and a disk array unit. This
is useful for path failover when a failure occurred on a path and load balancing using multiple paths.
PD
See Physical Disk.
415
Persistent Target
iSCSI targets to which the iSCSI initiator reconnects whenever the computer is rebooted so that the
initiator always appear to be connected to the target.
Physical Disk
A disk, which provides storage capacity and exists as a physical entity. It can be of different type
such as SAS, SATA, and SSD.
Pool
A virtual medium in which multiple physical disks configured using the RAID technology, are
regarded as one large disk. The pool is created using the Storage Manager.
Port
A physical connection point on devices such as computers, switches, and disk arrays, which is used
to connect to other devices on a network.
Port Number
Port Number is a part of the internet addressing information used to identify the specific process to
which the network data is to be delivered.
Proxy exception
Proxy exceptions allows you to specify domain names and/or IP address ranges, which are to be
accessed directly bypassing the proxy server.
Proxy server
A server that acts as an intermediary between a client and the other servers in order to achieve
network security, administrative control, caching, filtering, and anonymity. A client connects to the
proxy server, requesting some service available from a different server. The proxy server evaluates
the request according to its filtering rules.
R
RAID
See Redundant Array of Independent Disks.
Redundant Array of Independent Disks
A storage technology that provides increased data performance and reliability through data
redundancy and striping, combining multiple disk drives components into a single logical unit.
Replicate
When Replicate is performed, data copy from Master Volume (MV) to Replica Volume (RV) starts, to
reflect the content of the MV into the RV. Updates made in the MV after Replicate is performed are
also reflected into the RV.
Replication
Replication is a technique that copies the exact same data from a Master to a Replica. Since the
Master and the Replica are completely independent, data reliability is high.
Restore
When Restore is performed, data copy from Replica Volume (RV) to Master Volume (MV) starts to
reflect the data stored in the RV at the start of Restore into the MV. When Restore (update) is
performed, updates made in MV after Restore are reflected in RV.
416
User Guide
Revolutions Per Minute
It measures the number of times a disk revolve in a minute. It determines the speed of data access
on the disk drive. The higher RPM value specifies the higher data access speed.
rpm
See Revolutions Per Minute.
S
SAN
See Storage Area Network.
SAS
See Serial Attached SCSI.
SD memory card
See Secure Digital card.
Secret
See CHAP secret.
Secure Digital card
Secure Digital (SD) card is a compact non volatile memory card used for storing data.
Separate
When Separate is performed, the difference between Master Volume (MV) and Replica Volume
(RV) at the start of Separate is reflected into the RV to separate it. Updates made in MV after
Separate is performed are not reflected in RV.
Serial Attached SCSI
A high speed data transfer technology using SCSI which employs serial data transfer to and from
storage devices like hard disk drives.
Simple Network Management Protocol
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is used to manage devices on the network. This
protocol defines how communication occurs between SNMP-capable devices and defines the
SNMP message types. SNMP facilitates network administrators to manage network performance,
solve network problems, and plan for network growth.
Snapshot
Snapshot is a technique that copies only difference data from a Master to a Replica. Compared to a
full copy, a Replica can be created using little capacity, so storage can be operated efficiently.
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol.
Solid State Drive
A data storage device, which uses non-volatile memory chips to store persistent data.They are
characterized by not having any moving parts and hence are more resistent to physical shocks,
quieter, and have lower access time and latency.
Spare
Unused physical disks in a pool that can be used to replace a failed disk. In case of failure, the data
can be restored on a spare.
417
SSD
See Solid State Drive.
Storage Area Network
A storage architecture that connects storage devices such as disk arrays and servers across the
network for enhanced reliability, scalability, and performance.
Straight cable
This cable is used to connect different types of devices. A straight cable can be used to connect the
computer to a hub or a switch.
Subnet mask
Subnet mask determines the subnetwork an IP address belong to. A subnet mask allows to identify
which part of an IP address is reserved for the network, and which part is available for host use.
T
TCP
See Transmission Control Protocol.
Transmission Control Protocol
Communication protocol that enables two hosts to connect to one another and exchange streams of
data. This protocol ensures that the data is transferred and guarantees that the data is received in
the same sequence in which it was sent.
U
UDP
See User Datagram Protocol.
User Datagram Protocol
A data transmission protocol used to transfer messages (datagram) between hosts without
providing any ordering or sequencing capability as in TCP.
V
Virtual LAN
A group of devices that behave as if they are connected to the same network segment regardless of
their physical location.
VLAN
See Virtual LAN.
W
World Wide Name
World Wide Name (WWN) is a unique identifier assigned to a Host Bus Adapter (HBA) in the Fibre
Channel network. WWN is an 8 byte number and its format is defined by IEEE OUI and vendor
supplied information.
418
User Guide
World Wide Port Name
World Wide Port Name is a World Wide Name (WWN) assigned to the Fibre Channel (FC) port. It is
equivalent to the MAC address in Ethernet protocol and is a unique identifier in the network.
WWN
See World Wide Name.
419
420
User Guide
Index
Index
A
CHAP Parameter Settings 367
Check connection from application server
FC 112, 152
Linux 331
Windows 264
iSCSI 154, 155, 192
Linux 349
VMware 370
Windows 290
Check Multipath Settings and Status 303, 332
Collect Host Information
Automatically 113
Using host information collection command
114
Configuring IP Addresses 93
Connect
Application Server 64
Cables 63
Disk Array Unit 63, 93
LAN Cables 65
Port Connection 64
Power Supply Cables 66
Control Systems 37
Controller xxi, xxviii, 16
Installing a Controller 201
Removing a Controller 201
Customer Support 251
AC Operating Mode 34, 35
AC Power Off Sequence 38
AC Power Supply 67
Accessories 48
Acronyms and Abbreviations xix, xxi, xxvi
Active/Fault LED 30
Adapter 20
Adapter (ADP) 32
Adding Application Servers 212
Assigning a logical disk to application server
FC 112, 148
iSCSI 154, 155, 188
Auto Cache Flush Function 41
B
Battery xxxi, 207
Insert a new battery 207
Remove the battery 207
BBU 207
Before Starting Storage Manager Client 76
Bind Hot Spare
FC 112, 134
iSCSI 154, 155, 179
Bind Logical Disk
FC 112, 138
iSCSI 154, 155, 183
Bind Pool
FC 112, 129
iSCSI 154, 155, 174
Binding Additional Logical Disks
FC 211
iSCSI 214
D
C
Changes to the Configuration 209
CHAP Authentication 292, 342, 343, 355, 367,
401
421
Data replication function 40
DIP Switch 210
Modify Settings 210
Direct Connection Configuration 392
Disk Array Controller xxvi
Power 31
Disk Array Controller (DAC) xxi
Disk Array Enclosure Adapter 32
Disk Array Unit 51
Components 3
Controller (CONT) 16
Front View 3
Index
User Guide
Initialization 45
Disk capacity 74
Disk Drive xxi, 29, 61, 202
2.5-inch 16, 61
3.5-inch 16, 61
Features 197
Front View 17
Installing a disk drive 59
Removing a disk drive 202
Disk Enclosure xxxiii, 16, 29, 64
Adapter 20
Front view 16
Power Supply 19
Rear view 18
Disk Port Status 32
DP0 203
DP0-IN 203
DP0-OUT 203
Dummy carrier xxi, 17, 60
DynamicDataReplication 40
iSCSI 179
I
ID LED 30
Initializing Application Server
FC 49
iSCSI 269, 336, 355
Initializing FC Disk Array 111
Assigning Logical Disks 148
Binding a Hot Spare 134
Binding a Pool 129
Binding Logical Disks 138
Checking Connection from Application Server 152, 192
Collecting Host Information 113
Initializing Wizard 116
Registering Host Information 143
Initializing iSCSI Disk Array 153
Assigning Logical Disks 188
Binding a Hot Spare 179
Binding a Pool 174
Binding Logical Disks 183
Host Connection Port Parameters 166
Initializing Wizard 156
iSCSI Setup Tool 173
Inner Rail 55
Installation
Disk Drives 59
iSCSI Software Initiator 273, 340
Network Setting Tool 83
Optional Parts 193
Storage Manager Agent Utility 106, 255, 324
StoreWay Multipath 278, 341, 377
iSCSI Cable Length 63
iSCSI Setup Tool 287
iSMCLI 403
E
Ear Bezels or Front Bezel Clips 56
Electrostatic 198
ESMPRO/AC 37
Example
iSCSI Connection Configuration 391
LAN Cable Connection 65
Recommended Configuration 71
F
FC Cable Length 63
Flow from Installation to Operation 43
Front Bezel 16, 199
Inserting a front bezel 199
Removing a front bezel 201
J
H
Java Runtime Environment 73
JRE 73
Host bus adapter (HBA) xxi, 224
Host Information 114, 233, 259, 326
Hot Spare Bind
FC 134
422
User Guide
Index
L
Installation and Removal 199
P
LAN Cables 48, 65
LED Display 21, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29
LED Inspection Checksheet
Disk Array Unit 385
Life Span of Parts 251
List display-Hot Spare Bind
FC 135
iSCSI 179
Lithium batteries xxxv
Logical Disk Bind
FC 138
iSCSI 183
Path patrol daemon 334
Physical Disk (PD) xxii
Pool Bind
FC 112, 129
iSCSI 154, 155, 174
Port Connection
FC 64
iSCSI 65
Power control systems 37
Power LED 30, 39, 41
Power Supply
AC Power Supply xxviii
DC Power Supply xxviii, xxxiv
Power supply xxii, 19
Power Supply Cables 66
Powering Off the Disk Array System 39
Powering On the Disk Array System 34
M
Maintenance Port 20
Management Port 65
Management Server 70, 392, 393
Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) 167
Modify Configuration
FC 211
iSCSI 214
Mounting a Disk Drive 61
MPIO function 278
R
N
Nearline SAS HDD 197
NEC Storage PathManager
Linux 382
Network Interface Card (NIC) xxi, 63, 270, 337,
356
Network Setting Tool 83, 92, 225
Next generation Java plug-in 81
NTP server 121, 163
O
Operating System 74
Operation management 2
Optima3600 Series Optional Parts 194
Optional Parts 194, 196
423
Rack 203
Rack Mount Kit 52
RAID 129
Rail 52
Attaching to Front Pole 53
Attaching to Rear Pole 53, 54
RemoteDataReplication 40
Removing a dummy carrier 60
S
SAS Cable 203, 204
SAS HDD 197
Script
isns.vbs 395
Service LED 30, 36
Set host connection port parameters (iSCSI) 166
Set iSNS Server 169
Set Time Zone
Linux 104
Windows 99
Index
User Guide
Set/Check Application Server
FC 255, 324
iSCSI 269, 336, 354, 355
Snapshot function 37
Software Installation and Configuration 44
SSD 197
Standby LED 30
Start Storage Manager Client 107
Status Display LED 20, 32
Storage Manager 2, 44, 65, 69, 70
Storage Manager Agent Utility 106
Storage Manager Client
Operating Environment 72
Storage Manager Express 2, 70
Storage Manager Suite 2, 70
StoreWay Multipath 49, 241, 243, 278, 341, 377
Windows 377
Switch Connection Configuration 393
T
Transfer host information file 259, 326
Troubleshooting
Device Conditions 218
IP Setting Tool Errors 225
iSCSI Setup Tool Errors 234
Storage Manager Errors 226
StoreWay Multipath (Linux) Errors 243
StoreWay Multipath (Windows) Errors 241
U
Unlock License
FC 122
iSCSI 164
UPS 37
User Datagram Protocol (UDP) 92, 225
User Support 250
V
View display-Hot Spare Bind
FC 135
iSCSI 180
VMKernel Port 359
424
Volume 40, 41, 177, 231, 389
W
Warning labels xxv
Web browser 44, 73, 76, 107
Web GUI 44, 76, 79, 107
Windows xvii, 72, 76, 83, 99, 106, 113, 255, 269,
377
Workflow 43
WWN 49
WWPN 49
BULL CEDOC
357 AVENUE PATTON
B.P.20845
49008 ANGERS CEDEX 01
FRANCE
REFERENCE
86 A1 33FH 03